1078782 westwood architectural specification-7500 - rev … · 2017-08-21 · project specification...

1 Project Specification Westwood Primary School, March, Cambridgeshire

F

PROJECT SPECIFICATION

Westwood Primary School March, Cambridgeshire

August 2017

The Business and Technology Centre Bessemer Drive, Stevenage

SG1 2DX

Telephone: (0161) 3448731

Architectural Specification Job No 1078782 Doc. Ref: 7500 Rev: P01.03

Rev P01.03 Initial Issue for comment.


Document Control

Details

Project title Westwood Primary School

Document title Architectural Specification

Document Ref: 7500

Revision P01.03

Status S0 – for Comment

Control date August 2017

Record of Issue

Issue Author Date Check Date Authorised Date

P01 M ATPUTHARATNAM 31-07-17 D DHOLOKIA M ATPUTHARATNAM 02-08-17

P01.02 M ATPUTHARATNAM 05-08-17 D DHOLOKIA - M ATPUTHARATNAM 05-08-17

P01.03 M ATPUTHARATNAM 10-08-17 D DHOLOKIA - M ATPUTHARATNAM 10-08-17


Table of Contents

Title Page

C Existing site/buildings/services

C10 Site survey

C20 Demolition

F Brickwork

F10 Brick/block walling

F30 Accessories/sundry items for brick/block/ stone walling

G Structural/Carcassing metal/timber

G10 Structural steel framing

G20 Accessories/sundry items for brick/block/ stone walling

H Cladding/Covering

H11 Curtain Walling

H71 Lead sheet coverings/ flashings

H92 Rainscreen cladding

J Waterproofing

J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing

J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings

K Linings/Sheathing/Dry partitioning

K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

K11 Rigid sheet flooring-sheating-decking-sarking-linings-casings

K32 Panel cubicles

K40 Demountable suspended ceilings

L Windows/Doors/Stairs

L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches

L40 General glazing

M Surface finishes

M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds

M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings


M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for plastered/ rendered coatings

M40 Stone/ concrete/ quarry/ ceramic tiling/ mosaic

M50 Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting

M60 Painting/clear finishing

M61 Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelwork

N Furniture/Equipment

N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment

N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings

N14 General signage systems

N15 Fire and safety signage systems

N17 Portable fire fighting systems

N25 Permanent access and safety equipment

P Building fabric sundries

P10 Sundry insulation/ proofing work

P12 Fire stopping systems

P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

P21 Door/ window ironmongery

P30 Trenches, pipeways and pits for buried engineering services

P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports for services

R Disposal systems

R10 Rainwater drainage systems

R11 Above ground foul drainage systems

Z Building fabric reference specification

Z10 Purpose made joinery

Z11 Purpose made metalwork

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

Z20 Fixings and adhesives

Z21 Mortars

Z22 Sealants

Z31 Powder coatings

C10


C10 Site survey

C10


C10 Site survey

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

GENERAL

110 EXTENT OF SURVEY • Location: Westwood Primary School, March, Cambridgeshire.

• Scope: drainage, site levels and elevations. • Objectives: to determine details of existing structures and site.

130 BACKGROUND INFORMATION SOURCES • Subject: Existing services and features. • Source: Health and Safety file. • Contact: Cambridgeshire County Council / Kier Group (Eastern)

140 ACCESS TO THE SITE FOR SURVEYING • Details: as clause 130. • Contact: as clause 130.

150 BENCH MARKS • Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Give notice when found

and notify Ordnance Survey.

160 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS • Unrecorded hazards and hazardous materials: Give notice when found. Do not

disturb.

170 SURVEY INSTRUMENTS • Equipment calibration: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. • Site use calibration: To BS 7334. • Calibration: Use only persons accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation

Service (UKAS). • Calibration compliance: Submit evidence prior to use.

180 WORKMANSHIP • Operatives: Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type of work. • Qualifications of operatives: Submit evidence prior to commencement.

190 PHOTOGRAPHS • Digital photographs: Required. - Format: jpeg. - Effective pixels: 5 million. - Presentation: On CD. - Index and thumbnail images: required. • Subjects: locating views and close ups of all points of interest, Recording

condition of existing building finishes and ground surfaces.

C10


SURVEY WORKS

220 SITE SURVEY

− Examine all available information, carry out a survey and submit a report to include the following:

− Area to be surveyed: All structures and surface in the immediate vicinity of the works.

− Features to be included: Ground / soil levels relative to the floor levels of existing structures prior to the commencement of the works.

− Specific requirements as to: as above.

240 SETTING OUT/ CONTROL SURVEY


− Area to be surveyed: as stated in clause220. − Features to be included: as clause 220.

− Specific requirements as to method: none.

300 SERVICES SURVEY


− Area to be surveyed: immediate area around proposed works and adjacent buildings.

− Features to be included: All above and underground utilities to include gas, water, electric telecommunications cable TV and CCTV.

− Specific requirements as to method: None.

310 GROUND PENETRATING RADAR SURVEY


− Area to be surveyed: As drawing 1003.

− Features to be included: pipelines, cables and underground voids. − Specific requirements as to method: none.

340 PROTECTION • Protect the following: existing structures.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION

− Survey report: Submit.

− Contents: record drawings. − Copies: 3.

− Format: Contractor's choice.

− Computer based electronic files: Submit. − Electronic file formats: Drawings and sketches Autocad version 2015.

C20


C20

Demolition

C20


C20 Demolition

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

110 DESK STUDY/ SURVEY

− Scope: Before starting demolition work, examine available information, carry out a survey of the structures, site and surrounding area.

− Report and method statements: Submit, describing:

− Form, condition and details of the structures, site and surrounding area.

− Extent: all building areas within 10m of the proposed works. − Form, location and removal methods of flammable, toxic or hazardous

materials. − Form, location and removal methods of materials for reuse or recycling.

− Type and location of adjoining or surrounding premises which may be adversely affected by noise, vibration, dust or removal of structure.

− Identification and location of services above and below ground, including those required for the Contractor's own use. Arrangements for disconnection and removal of services.

− Type and location of features of historical, archaeological, geological or ecological importance.

− Sequence and method of demolition including details of specific pre-weakening.

− Arrangements for protection of personnel and the public including exclusion of unauthorized persons.

− Arrangements for effective separation of the site works from the occupied areas of the building and areas used by the school including control of site transport and traffic.

− Proposed programme of work. − Special requirements: dust control and avoidance of disturbance of

adjacent areas to the works.

− Format of report: electronic- pdf- 2no. disks.

120 EXTENT OF DEMOLITION

− General: Subject to retention requirements specified elsewhere demolish structures down to bottom of foundation level.

130 GROUNDWORKS

− General:

− Old foundations, slabs and the like: Break out where and to the extent stated.

− Contaminated material: Remove and carry out remediation required by the Enforcing Authority.

140 BENCH MARKS

− Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Give notice when found.

− Do not remove or destroy.

150 FEATURES TO BE RETAINED

− General: Keep in place and protect the following: effective enclosure and weathering of the retained buildings.

SERVICES AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION

C20


210 SERVICES REGULATIONS � Work carried out to or which affects new or existing services: Carry out in

accordance with the Byelaws or Regulations of the relevant Statutory Authority.

220 LOCATION OF SERVICES � Services affected by the Works: Locate and mark positions. � Mains services: Arrange with the appropriate authorities for location and marking of

positions. � Standard: In accordance with National Joint Utilities Group (NJUG) 'Guidelines on

the positioning and colour coding of underground utilities' apparatus'.

230 DISCONNECTION - ARRANGED BY CONTRACTOR � General: Arrange with the appropriate authorities for disconnection of services and

removal of fittings and equipment prior to starting demolition.

240 DISCONNECTION OF DRAINS � General: Locate disconnect and seal disused drain connections. � Sealing: Within the site and permanent.

250 DRAINS IN USE � General: Protect drains, manholes, inspection chambers, gullies, vent pipes and

fittings still in use and ensure that they are kept free of debris. � Damage: Make good damage arising from demolition work. Leave clean and in

working order at completion.

260 BYPASS CONNECTIONS � General: Provide as necessary to maintain continuity of services to occupied areas

of the same and adjoining properties. � Minimum notice to occupiers: 72 hours if shutdown is necessary during

changeover.

270 SERVICES WHICH ARE TO REMAIN � Damage: Give notice and notify service authority or owner of damage arising from

the execution of the works. � Repairs: Complete as directed, and to the satisfaction of the service authority or

owner.

DEMOLITION WORK

310 WORKMANSHIP • Standard: Demolish structures in accordance with BS 6187. • Operatives: - Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type of work. - Holding or in training to obtain relevant CITB Certificates of Competence. • Site staff responsible for supervision and control of work: Experienced in the

assessment of risks involved and methods of demolition to be used. 320 GAS OR VAPOUR RISKS

• Precautions: Prevent fire or explosion caused by gas or vapour. 330 DUST CONTROL

• General: Reduce airborne dust by periodically spraying demolition works with an appropriate wetting agent. Keep public roadways and footpaths clear of mud and

debris.

C20


• Lead dust: Submit method statement for control, containment and clean-up regimes.

340 HEALTH HAZARDS • Precautions: Protect site operatives and general public from hazards associated

with vibration, dangerous fumes and dust arising during the course of the Works.

350 ADJOINING PROPERTY • Temporary support and protection: Provide. Maintain and alter as necessary as

work progresses. • Damage: Minimize. Promptly repair. - Leave no unnecessary or unstable projections. - Make good to ensure safety, stability, weather protection and security. • Support to foundations: Do not disturb. • Defects: Report when exposed or becoming apparent.

360 STRUCTURES TO BE RETAINED • Parts which are to be kept in place: Protect. • Extent of work: Cut away and strip out with care to reduce the amount of making

good to a minimum.

370 PARTLY DEMOLISHED STRUCTURES • General: Leave in a stable condition, with adequate temporary support at each

stage to prevent risk of uncontrolled collapse. Keep safe outside working hours. • Temporary works: Prevent debris from overloading. • Unauthorised persons: Prevent access.

380 DANGEROUS OPENINGS • General: Illuminate and protect. Keep safe outside working hours.

390 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS • General: These are known to be present in the structures to be demolished in the

following locations: Refer to Cambridgeshire County Council Asbestos report related to the intrusive

survey completed. J028926, Asbestos Report 1, J034297, Asbestos Report 2, J164911 V2 Asbestos Report 3.

• Removal: of all materials noted to contain asbestos within the report

391 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS • Discovery: Give notice immediately of any further suspected asbestos containing

materials discovered during demolition work. Avoid disturbing such materials. • Methods for safe removal. Submit details and statutory risk assessments.

410 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS • Unrecorded voids, tanks, chemicals, etc. discovered during demolition: Give notice. • Methods for safe removal, filling, etc: Submit details.

440 SITE CONDITION AT COMPLETION • Debris: Clear away and leave the site in a tidy condition. • Other requirements: confirm that all asbestos has been safely removed and that

consignment notes are provided and that certification confirms that no asbestos remains.

C20


442 SITE SURFACE AT COMPLETION • Levels: Grade the site to follow the levels of adjacent areas. • Temporary surface: Cover the site with 100mm crushed brick/concrete- finished

level to be 700mm below finished floor level of the ground floor of the new building.

MATERIALS ARISING

510 CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY • Components and materials arising from the demolition work: Property of the

Contractor except where otherwise provided. - Remove from site as work proceeds where not to be reused or recycled for site

use.

511 EMPLOYER'S PROPERTY • Components and materials to remain the property of the Employer: none • Protection: - Maintain throughout the Works until the end of the Contract: • Special requirements: boiler house remains in use throughout the project.

520 RECYCLED MATERIALS • Materials arising from demolition work: Should be recycled or reused elsewhere in

the project, subject to compliance with the appropriate specification and in accordance with the site waste management plan. Excess demolition rubble to be carted off site.

• Evidence of compliance: Submit full details and supporting documentation. • Verification: Allow adequate time in programme for verification of compliance.

F10


F10 Brick/ block walling

F10


F10 Brick/ block walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions and Structural Specification.

TYPES OF WALLING

110 CLAY FACING BRICKWORK: External Walls to new extensions � Manufacturer: BEA BUILDING PRODUCTS LTD, Cromwell House Heath Road

Warboys Huntingdon, Cambs PE28 2UW, 01487 825020 Contact:[email protected], [email protected]

� Bricks: Clay Facing Bricks F2 Quality � Product reference: TBC, Product code:TBC

� Special shapes: Pistol bricks

� Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime: sand. - Additional requirements: None. � Bond: Half lap Stretcher. � Joints: Bucket handle. � Features: None.

350 CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK GENERALLY LAID IN SINGLE LEAF, INNER LEAF OF EXTERNAL WALL

• Blocks: To BS 6073-1.

- Manufacturer: Forterra Building Products Ltd. Product reference: Fenlite 1500 Background Aggregate Block or similar approved.

- Type: Solid. - Average compressive strength (minimum): 7.3 N/mm². - Thermal conductivity (maximum) certified by UKAS accredited laboratory at not Applicable moisture content to BS EN 12664: Not applicable. - Work sizes (length x height x thickness): 440 x 215 x 140 and 440 x 215 x 100 mm. - Density of Block: 1500 Kg/ m3. - Special shapes: Coursing blocks. • Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: Not applicable. - Mix: 1:0.25:3 cement:lime:sand 12N/mm2 (mortar class12) below DPC and 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand 4N/mm2(mortar class 4) above DPC.. - Additional requirements: Durability: Freeze/ thaw resistance: Frost resistant below ground level. • Bond: Half lap stretcher. NB. Block weight not to exceed 20.kg- use coursing blocks to avoid heavy weight blocks.

380 ENGINEERING BRICKWORK FOR EXTENDED MANHOLES ABOVE SLAB AND BELOW DPC LEVEL WHERE EXPOSED ON ELEVATIONS

• Engineering bricks: To BS 3921. - Class B. - Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. Product reference: n/a. • Mortar: As section Z21. - Standard: To BS EN 998-2. - Mix: 1:0.25:3 cement:lime:sand, 12 N/mm² (mortar class 12).

F10


- Additional requirements: None. • Bond: English WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

430 CONDITIONING OF CLAY AND CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS � Bricks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use until cold. � Absorbent bricks in warm weather: Wet to reduce suction. Do not soak. �

440 CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS/ BLOCKS � Autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do

not use. � Age of nonautoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not use until at least four weeks

old. � Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not wet.

- Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details.

460 MORTAR GROUPS � Mix proportions: For a specified group select a mix design from the following:

________________________________________________________________________ __ Group 1 2 3 4 ________________________________________________________________________ __ PC*:lime:sand with or without air entraining additive 1:0-0.25:3 1:0.5-4.5 1:1:5-6 1:2:8-9 ________________________________________________________________________ __ Masonry cement:sand containing PC* and lime in approx ratio 1:1, and an air entraining additive - 1:3 1:3.5-4 1:4.5 ________________________________________________________________________ __ Masonry cement:sand containing PC* and inorganic materials other than lime and air entraining additive - 1:2.5-3.5 1:4-5 1:5.5-6.5 ________________________________________________________________________ __ PC*:sand and air entraining additive 1:3 1:3-4 1:5-6 1:7-8 ________________________________________________________________________ __ PC* = Portland cement

� Batching: Mix proportions by volume. � Mortar type: Continuous throughout any one type of masonry work.

500 LAYING GENERALLY � Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full bed. � Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher. � Vertical joints in facework: Even widths. Plumb at every fifth cross joint.

520 ACCURACY � Courses: Level and true to line. � Faces, angles and features: Plumb.

F10


� Permissible deviations: - Position in plan of any point in relation to the specified building reference line and/ or point at the same level ± 10 mm. - Straightness in any 5 m length ± 5 mm. - Verticality up to 3 m height ± 10 mm. - Verticality up to 7 m height ± 14 mm. - Overall thickness of walls ± 10 mm. - Level of bed joints up to 5 m (brick masonry) ± 11 mm. - Level of bed joints up to 5 m ± 13 mm.

535 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC LIME MORTAR

� Quoins and advance work: Rack back. � Lift height (maximum): 1.2 m above any other part of work at any time. � Daily lift height (maximum): 1.5 m for any one leaf.

540 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING THIN JOINT MORTAR GLUE � Quoins and advance work: Rack back. � Lift height (maximum): 1.3 m above any other part of work at any time.

545 LEVELLING OF SEPARATE LEAVES � Locations for equal levelling of cavity wall leaves: As follows:

- Every course containing vertical twist type ties or other rigid ties. - Every third tie course for double triangle/ butterfly ties.

� Courses in which lintels are to be bedded.

560 COURSING BRICKWORK � Gauge: Four brick courses including bed joints to 300 mm.

561 COURSING BRICKWORK WITH EXISTING � Gauge: Line up with existing brick courses.

580 LAYING FROGGED BRICKS � Single frogged bricks: Frog uppermost. � Double frogged bricks: Larger frog uppermost. � Frog cavity: Fill with mortar.

595 LINTELS � Bearing: Ensure full length masonry units occur immediately under lintel ends.

635 JOINTING � Profile: Consistent in appearance.

645 ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW � Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds.

671 FIRE STOPPING � Avoidance of fire and smoke penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and

masonry. � Leave no gaps.

690 ADVERSE WEATHER � General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.

F10


� Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks: - In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at least 1°C and rising. - In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C and rising. - In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar manufacturer.

� Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened. � Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:

- Rain and snow. - Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FACEWORK

710 THE TERM FACEWORK � Definition: Applicable in this specification to brick/ block walling finished fair. � Painted facework: The only requirement to be waived is that relating to colour.

730 BRICK/ CONCRETE BLOCK SAMPLES � General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit for approval of

appearance labelled samples of the following: F10/ 110A & 110B. � Selection of samples: Representative of the range in variation of appearance.

750 COLOUR CONSISTENCY OF MASONRY UNITS � Colour range: Submit proposals of methods taken to ensure that units are of

consistent and even appearance within deliveries. � Conformity: Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous

deliveries and with approved reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive. � Finished work: Free from patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks.

760 APPEARANCE � Brick/ block selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises. � Cut masonry units: Where cut faces or edges are exposed cut with table masonry

saw. � Quality control: Lay masonry units to match relevant reference panels.

- Setting out: To produce satisfactory junctions and joints with built-in elements and components.

� Coursing: Evenly spaced using gauge rods. � Lifts: Complete in one operation. � Methods of protecting facework: Submit proposals.

780 GROUND LEVEL � Commencement of facework: Not less than 150 mm below finished level of

adjoining ground or external works level.

790 PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING � Use: Not permitted in facework.

800 TOOTHED BOND � New and existing facework in same plane: Bond together at every course to

achieve continuity.

830 CLEANLINESS � Facework: Keep clean. � Mortar on facework: Allow to dry before removing with stiff bristled brush. � Removal of marks and stains: Rubbing not permitted

F30


F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/block/stone walling

F30


F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions and Structural Specification.

CAVITIES

110 CONCRETE FILL TO BASE OF CAVITY � Concrete generally: To BS EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2.

- Designated concrete: GEN 1. Workability: High.

� Extent: Maintain 75 mm between top of fill and external ground level and a minimum of 225 mm between top of fill and ground level dpc.

� Placement: Compact to eliminate voids.

120 CLEANLINESS � Cavity base and faces, ties, insulation and exposed dpcs: Free from mortar and

debris.

132 PERPEND JOINT PLASTICS WEEP HOLES � Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Limited, Administration Centre, Yeovil, Somerset, BA22

8HU. Tel: 01935 474769, Fax: 01935 428223. Web: www.cavitytrays.com E-mail: [email protected]

� Product reference: Type W Cavitray weep-vent. � Locations: Through outer leaf immediately above base of cavity, at cavity trays,

stepped dpcs and external openings. 75 mm above top of cavity fill at base of cavity.

� Provision: At not greater than 1000 mm centres and not less than two over each opening.

155 PARTIAL FILL CAVITY INSULATION � Insulation: Hermetically sealed closed cell glass structure � Manufacturer: Pittsburgh Corning (UK) Ltd. 31-35 Kirby Street, Hatton Garden

London, EC1N 8TE Phone +44 (0)20 7492 1731, Fax +44 (0)20 7492 1730 [email protected], www.foamglas.co.uk - Product reference: FOAMGLAS WALLBOARD W & F.

� Face size (length x width): To suit wall tie spacing. � Thickness (nominal): 50 mm – 75mm, Refer plans and details. � Thermal conductivity: < 0.038 W/mK. � Additional requirements: None. � Placement: Secure against face of inner leaf of blockwork.

- Residual cavity: Clear and unobstructed. � Joints between boards, at closures and penetrations: No gaps and free from mortar

and debris.

171 VENTILATION DUCTS IN EXTERNAL WALLING � Manufacturer: Rytons or similar approved

- Product reference: Periscope Underfloor Ventilator, ref. PUFV in conjunction with the 65x215 Rytons Multifix air bricks (to match facing bricks) and Rytons TCL8000 9_ x 3_ Telescopic Airliner. Include for extension pieces as necessary to link the air bricks to the under floor void.

� Install to all external sides of the building at 1.5m maximum centres to ventilate the void beneath the suspended ground floor. (1500mm2 minimum clear air space / per metre run of wall to be achieved) Include for extending the ventilation liners through the external ramps and steps, as necessary, with the air bricks located in the ramp/step brickwork.

F30


� Placement: Across cavity, sloping away from inner leaf. Full mortar joints to seal cavity.

� Install ventilators in full accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that ventilation holes, minimum size 225x75mm, are left in all sleeper walls at 2m maximum centres, to allow cross ventilation to occur. Protection from water penetration to inner leaf: Where barrier is not integral to duct, form stepped dpc cavity tray with stop ends above duct, extending 150 mm on each side.

180 CAVITY CLOSERS : TO ALL EXTERNAL WINDOW AND DOOR OPENINGS - Rockwool RockClose

� Manufacturer: ROCKWOOL Ltd. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk. Email: [email protected]. Tel: +44 (0)1656 862621. Address: 26-28 Hammersmith Grove, London W6 7HA

� Product reference: Rockwool RockClose

REINFORCING/ FIXING ACCESSORIES

211 CAVITY WALL TIES FOR EXTERNAL WALLS COMPRISING TWO LEAVES

MASONRYCONSTRUCTION � Standard: To BS EN 845-1.

- Type: 2 (Masonry general purpose). � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: RT2. - Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel.

� Sizes: To suit cavity. � End types: as manufactured. � Design embedment length (minimum): 50 mm. � Movement: Non tolerant. � Additional requirements: None.

221 WALL TIES FOR FIXING TO STEEL COLUMNS GENERALLY

� Standard: To BS EN 845-1. - Type: 2 (Masonry general purpose).

� Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products. - Product reference: SDV, SPA, SPV.

� Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: TO SUIT CAVITY MIN 125mm. � End types: Asymmetrical deformed plate and non deformed plate for mortar

bedding. � Design embedment length: 50 mm Min. � Additional requirements: where fixed to columns provide isolation sleeve.

222 INDIVIDUAL BRACKETS BLOCKWORK TO STEEL COLUMNS � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon or equivalent.

- Product reference: Ancon PPB with single fixing ties with debonding sleeves. � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel.

- Thickness (minimum): 5 mm. � Sizes: To suit cavity width. � Vertical load capacity: As advised by the Structural Engineer. � Additional requirements: Slip joints as per drawings.

F30


223 WALL TIES in internal block wall � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products, President Way, President Park, Sheffield

S4 7UR. � Tel: 0114 275 5224 or equivalent.

- Product reference: Ancon PPS debonded. � Material/ finish: Stainless steel. � Sizes: Length to suit site conditions. 150mm Nominal.

224 FRAME CRAMPS FIXED TO STEEL COLUMNS AND FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CLADDING TO SFS FRAMING � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon or equivalent.

- Product reference: SDB or SPV with single fixing hole � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel.

- Thickness (minimum): 5 mm. � Sizes: Length to suit site conditions. 150mm Nominal.

225 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS

� Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm. � Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf, without bending. Drip

centred in the cavity and pointing downwards. � Spacing: Staggered in alternate courses.

- Horizontal centres: 750mm. - Vertical centres: 450mm.

� Additional ties: Provide within 225 mm of reveals of unbonded openings. - Spacing: 225mm.

233 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS WITH PARTIAL FILL CAVITY

INSULATION � Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm. � Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf, without bending. Drip

centred in the cavity and pointing downwards. � Spacing: Evenly space in non staggered horizontal and vertical rows.

- Horizontal centres: not more than 750mm but to suit insulation batt . - Vertical centres: 450 mm.

� Spacing centres of top (eaves) row of ties: Not more than 450 mm. � Provision of additional ties: Within 225 mm of reveals of unbonded openings.

- Spacing: 225mm.

236A FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CLADDING TO SFS FRAMING � Fixing ties to SFS: Fix 25/14 channel over insulation into stud beyond at 450mm

vertical centres using self-drilling screws. � Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 63 mm. � Placement: Slope downwards away from SFS frame, without bending. � Spacing:

- Horizontal centres: To suit stud centres. - Vertical centres: 450mm.

� Provision of additional ties: Within 225 mm of reveals of openings and at no more than 300mm centres vertically.

241 WALL STARTERS/ CONNECTORS

� Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products. - Product reference: Staifix Univeral Wall Starter System.

� Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: as manufactured. Length to suit wall height.

F30


245 SLOT TIES FOR FIXING TO STEEL FRAME. � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: SDV, SPA, SPV and PPV depending on location. � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: to suit cavity. � Slot fixing: Surface. � End types: Asymmetrical sliding tee slot end with deformed plate embedment end. � Design embedment length (minimum): 50 mm. � Additional requirements: Fix to steel frame using self driling screw. Provide isolation

sleeve to end of tie. Type PPV to have debonding sleeve. Where ties fit off centre to web, provide SPA frame cramp.

248 SLOT TIES USED WITH PARTIAL FILL INSULATION FOR USE WHERE SFS

SYSTEM USED � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: SD25. � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: to suit cavity. � Slot fixing: Embedded. � End types: Asymmetrical sliding tee slot end with deformed plate embedment end. � Design embedment length (minimum): 63mm. � Additional requirements: None. � Tie mounted insulation retaining clips: As recommended by tie manufacturer.

251 WALL HEAD RESTRAINT SLIP TIES TO HEAD OF ALL INTERNAL MASONRY WALLS AND INNER LEAF OF ALL EXTERNAL MASONRY WALLS � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: IHR-B. � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: To suit masonry coursing details. � Shear load capacity: 1.5kN. � End types: Symmetrical deformed plate for mortar bedding. � Stem length: to suit masonry detailing min 215mm. � Design embedment length (minimum): as manufactured. � Allowable joint thickness (minimum): 10mm. � Additional requirements: allow for possible 20mm tolerance to u/s beam over. Fix to

steel using M8 bolt.

255 WIND POSTS � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: WP1. � Material: Austenitic stainless steel grade 1.4301 (304). � Sizes: as drawings. � Fixings (complete with washers and shims): to concrete foundation or deck

dependent on location.

270 MESHWORK JOINT REINFORCEMENT for parapet - Three Storey building � Standard: To BS EN 845-3. � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: AMR/S/D3.0/60. � Type: Welded wire ladder type. � Material: Austenitic stainless steel.

F30


� Width: Approximately 40-50 mm less in width than wall or leaf. � Placement: Lay on an even bed of mortar in a continuous strip with full laps at

angles. Keep back 20 mm from face of external work, 12 mm back from face of internal work and finish joint to normal thickness.

� Lap length (minimum): 450mm

282 GENERAL PURPOSE SLIP TIES FOR MOVEMENT JOINTS Generally � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Product reference: PPS. � Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel. � Sizes: 225mm. � Shear load capacity: 3.0kN. � End types: Asymmetrical flat plate holed for vertical fixing and flat plate with slip

case. � Design embedment length (minimum): 50 mm. � Additional requirements: None. � Fixing centres: Alternate courses.

FLEXIBLE DAMP PROOF COURSES / CAVITY TRAYS

330 DAMP PROOF COURSE: - Use/location: All brick, stone or block course mortar beds 150mm above ground levels internally

and externally. - Preparation/Installation: Ensure Zedex High Bond DPC is installed following good practice set

out in BS 5628: Part 3: 2005. All DPCs must extend through the full thickness of the wall leaf, including pointing, applied rendering or other facing materials, and project beyond the external face by 5mm.

Zedex High Bond DPC must be laid on an even bed of wet mortar and perforations in adjacent courses of brickwork must be completely filled with mortar. All lap joints in the DPC must have 100mm overlap and be completely sealed using heat bonding.

- Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tradegar, NP22 5PY. Tel: 0870 6092084 Fax: 0870 8508169 Email: [email protected] Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk

- Reference: Visqueen Zedex High Bond High Performance DPC system. 340 PRE FORMED CAVITY TRAYS

� Manufacturer: Permanite Ltd Tewin Rd, Welyn Garden City, Herts AL47 1BP - Product reference: Permabit bitumen polymer high performance dpc system. - Locations: Windows, doors, lintel heads with masonry, complete with pre formed stop

ends. 345 FLEXIBLE SHEET CAVITY TRAYS: - Use/location: All brick, stone or blockwork where a cavity is formed requires a two-dimensional

linear run of cavity tray formed on site to prevent water ingress to the internal skin. To include all openings, shelf angles, head restraints and where a high level wall is built above a flat or sloping roof. Sloping roofs will require a stepped DPC.

- Preparation/Installation: Ensure Zedex High Bond DPC is installed following good practice set out in BS 5628: Part 3: 2005. All cavity trays must be laid on an even bed of wet mortar or heat bonded to the primed masonry or concrete substrate in both internal and external walls or alternatively face-fixed to the primed internal masonry or concrete leaf using heat bonding and Zedex DPC Fixing Strip and Zedex DPC Fixing Pins for Masonry and laid in the external mortar bed or heat bonded to the primed substrate. All lap joints in the cavity tray must have 100mm overlap and be completely sealed using heat bonding. When heat bonding to masonry or concrete substrates, prime with Visqueen High Performance Tanking Primer and allow to dry. All changes

F30


in direction and/ or level require the application of a site-formed Preformed Unit. Ensure all joints between site-formed Preformed Unit and Zedex High Bond DPC are sealed as above.

- Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tradegar, NP22 5PY. Tel: 0870 609 2084 Fax: 0870 850 8169 Email: [email protected] Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk

- Reference: Visqueen Zedex High Bond DPC system. 360 GAS RESISTANT DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS: - Use/location: All brick, stone or blockwork where a cavity is formed requires a two-dimensional

linear run of cavity tray formed on site to prevent water and ground gas ingress to the internal skin.

- Preparation/Installation: Ensure Zedex High Bond DPC is installed following good practice set out in BS 5628: Part 3: 2005. All cavity trays must be laid on an even bed of wet mortar or heat bonded to the primed masonry or concrete substrate in both internal and external walls or alternatively face-fixed to the primed masonry or concrete internal leaf using heat bonding and Zedex DPC Fixing Strip and Zedex DPC Fixing Pins for Masonry and laid in the external mortar bed or heat bonded to the primed substrate. All lap joints in the cavity tray must have 100mm overlap and be completely sealed using heat bonding. When heat bonding to masonry or concrete substrates, prime with Visqueen High Performance Tanking Primer and allow to dry. All changes in direction and/ or level require the application of a site-formed Preformed Unit.

Ensure all joints between site-formed Preformed Unit and Zedex High Bond DPC are sealed as above.


- Reference: Visqueen Zedex High Bond DPC system.

390 SITE FORMED DPC/ CAVITY TRAY JUNCTIONS/ STOP ENDS: - Use/location: All brick, stone or blockwork where a cavity is formed and a two-dimensional linear

run of cavity tray is formed on site shall require site-formed Preformed Units to all three-dimensional details, to prevent water or ground gas ingress to the internal skin.

- Preparation/Installation: Ensure site-formed Preformed Units are installed following good practice set out in BS 5628: Part 3: 2005. All site-formed Preformed Units must be laid on an even bed of wet mortar or heat bonded to the primed masonry or concrete substrate in both internal and external walls or alternatively face-fixed to the primed masonry or concrete internal leaf using heat bonding and Zedex DPC Fixing Strip and Zedex DPC Fixing Pins for Masonry and laid in the external mortar bed or heat bonded to the primed substrate. When heat bonding to masonry or concrete substrates, prime with Visqueen High Performance Tanking Primer and allow to dry. All lap joints with the cavity tray must be 100mm overlap and be completely sealed using heat bonding.


- Reference: Visqueen Zedex High Bond DPC system. INSTALLATION OF DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS

400 COLD WEATHER WORKING: Store Zedex High Bond DPC in a warm location prior to use.

415 HORIZONTAL DPCS � Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar, with 100 mm laps at

joints and full laps at angles.

F30


� Width: At least full width of leaf unless otherwise specified. Edges of dpc not covered with mortar or projecting into cavity.

� Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive next masonry course.

� Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable. - Width of Zedex High Bond DPC to be at least full width of masonry leaf unless otherwise

specified. Do not cover edges of DPC with mortar. - Where there are separate DPCs in each leaf of a cavity wall, ensure that edges do not project into

the cavity. - Immediately lay at least one further course of masonry on a thin even bed of fresh mortar. Keep

finished joint thickness as close to normal as practicable.

- All penetrations by reinforcing bars, etc must be sealed using heat bonded Zedex High Bond DPC.

425 GROUND LEVEL DPCS: Ensure continuity of DPC with Visqueen damp or gas proof membrane. 435 STEPPED DPCS: Where DPCs are installed in external walls on sloping ground, ensure that they are never less

than 150 mm above finished ground level and all changes in level are sealed using site-formed Preformed Units.

445 SILL DPCS

� Form and placement: In one piece and turned up at back when sill is in contact with inner leaf. 455 COPING/CAPPING DPCS:

Bed DPCs and copings/cappings in one operation to ensure maximum bond between masonry units, mortar and DPC. An even bed of fresh mortar to be above and below the DPC. Provide support for the DPC across the cavity.

465 SEALING DPCS PARAPET WALLS � Overlaps and junctions: Seal with Adhesive recommended by dpc manufacturer.

475 CAVITY TRAYS FORMED IN SITU: DPCs which span cavities to prevent the downward ingress of water to be: - Accurately formed to the profiles shown on drawings, and firmly secured. - In unjointed lengths wherever possible, otherwise lapped at least 100 mm and sealed using heat

bonding in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure a fully watertight or gas tight installation.

- When fully bonding to masonry or concrete substrate, prime with Visqueen High Performance Tanking Primer and allow to dry.

- Carefully cleaned to remove debris and mortar droppings before they set. - Carefully protected from perforation and other damage. 485 CAVITY TRAYS OVER OPENINGS AND OTHER CAVITY BRIDGINGS: To extend not less than 150 mm beyond ends of lintels/ bridgings ensuring site-formed Preformed

Stop End Units are incorporated.

515 DPC/ CAVITY TRAY LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - FLUSH � Treatment at face of masonry: Finish flush and clear of mortar at the following

locations: Generally .

525 DPC/ CAVITY TRAY LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - SET BACK

F30


� Treatment at face of masonry: Set back 5 mm from face of wall with recessed mortar joint to expose edge at the following locations: To roof abutments.

535 FACEWORK: Leading edge of DPCs/ cavity trays to project 5 mm from face of wall.

560 VERTICAL DPCS: To be in one piece wherever possible; otherwise overlap by not less than 100 mm with upper

piece outermost and fully seal using heat bonding. All penetrations by brick ties, reinforcing bars etc must be sealed using heat bonded Zedex High Bond DPC.

570 JAMB DPCS AT OPENINGS � Joint with cavity tray/ lintel at head: Full underlap. � Joint with sill/ horizontal dpc at base: Full overlap. � Projection into cavity: Not less than 25 mm. � Relationship with frame: In full contact.

JOINTS

610 MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH SEALANT TO EXTERNAL FACING BRICKWORK � Joint preparation and sealant application: As section Z22. � Filler: Aerofil 1.

- Thickness: To match design width of joint. - Manufacturer: Servicised - Product reference: not specified. - Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to correct depth to receive sealant system.

� Sealant: - Designation: ISO 11600-F-20LM. - Manufacturer: Fosroc Expandite Thioflex One. - Product reference: Fosroc Expandite Thioflex One.

� Colour: Grey

611 MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH SEALANT TO INTERNAL BLOCKWORK and PARTITIONS/ EXTERNAL INNER LEAF

� Joint preparation and sealant application: As section Z22. � Filler: Aerofil 1.

- Thickness: To match design width of joint. - Manufacturer: Servicised. - Product reference: not specified. - Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to

correct depth to receive sealant system. � Sealant:

- Designation: ISO 11600-F-20LM. - Manufacturer: Fosroc Expandite Thioflex One. - Product reference: Fosroc Expandite Thioflex One. - Colour: Buff.

630 UNEXPOSED CONTRACTION JOINTS

� Formation: Close butt as work proceeds.

650 POINTING IN FLASHINGS � Joint preparation: Free of debris and lightly wetted. � Pointing mortar: As for adjacent walling.

F30


� Placement: Fill joint and finish flush.

660 PINNING UP TO SOFFITS � Top joint of loadbearing walls: Fill and consolidate with mortar.

670 TOPS OF NON LOADBEARING WALLS � Restraints: 50 x 50 mm continuous softwood battens fixed at 600 mm centres with

14 gauge screws. - Fixing: Secure to soffit.

� Joint filler: 100mm Rockwool squashed to 25mm thickness. - Placement: Full, no gaps.

PROPRIETARY SILLS/ LINTELS/ COPINGS/ DRESSINGS

780 COPING SYSTEM � Manufacturer: Sotech Ltd.

- Product reference: Optima Cassette Rainscreen System � Material/ finish: Aluminium. Polyester Powder Coated (PPC) to BS6496.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

840 OPENINGS FOR FRAMES � Formation: Use accurate, rigid templates to required size.

850 WALL PLATES

� Placement: On full bed of mortar to correct horizontal level.

G10



G10



TO BE READ WITH PRELIMINARIES/ GENERAL CONDITIONS

TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S SPECIFICATION WHICH IS TO TAKE PRECEDENCE.

112A DESIGN OF EXTERNAL WALL - LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

The external wall framing construction drawings are indicative of the construction method, profile and layout required but do not preclude the submission of alternative methods of construction for clearance. The installation contractor will have a design responsibility for the construction detailing of the external wall framing system and steel framed staircases. Fabrication drawings including framing and fixing details and elevational layout drawings must be submitted and signed off prior to the commencement of fabrication/construction.

113 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH CONSTRUCTION ISSUE INFORMATION Submit the following module information:

- Drawings: Typical plan, section, elevations and details, at suitable scales. - Technical information, reports, calculations and certification demonstrating compliance with

specification. - Schedule of loads to be transmitted to supporting structure.

115 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS – GENERAL

• Members forming bracing systems or girders of lattice construction: Unless detailed or

instructed otherwise, position so that their lines of action intersect at a point. • Bolts/ Screws:

- Diameter (minimum): 16 mm. - Number per connection (minimum): Two, unless otherwise indicated. - Other requirements: None.

• Punching of bolt holes: Permitted except when detailed otherwise.

• Welds: At least 6 mm fillet.

• Other constraints: None.

120 DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS

• Requirement: Before preparing detailed fabrication drawings, submit:

- General arrangement drawings with individual steel members clearly identified. - Calculations for major connections.

125 SPECIFICATION STANDARD

• Standard: Comply with latest edition of National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS).

- Additional requirements: None. - Document availability: For the duration of the work, at fabrication shop and on site. - Details of connections to supporting structure. - Schedule of builder's work, special provisions and special attendance by others. - Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared. - Installation method statements and programme.

- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed items/ constructions.

G10


FRAME SYSTEMS

150 STEEL FRAMING SYSTEM • Manufacturer: Ayrshire Metals, Royal Oak Way, Daventry, Northamptonshire, NN11 8NR

Tel: + 44 (0) 1327 300990 E: [email protected] or equal approved. - System reference: Ayrshire SFS or EQUAL APPROVED. - The following design parameters are to apply. - Dead Load: The self weight of the external wall make-up to include the weight of boarding/insulation/ render/cladding fixed to the studs section in kN/m2 to be calculated from Architect's drawings showing External Wall Construction. (Unfactored Dead Load). The vertical weight of the brickwork is transfered directly to the main structure and not carried by the studs. Unfactored imposed load of 1.5kN/m2 to be applied over the first 2m of stud height - Service Load for the stud wall : 0.1kN/m2 - Imposed load for the stud wall : Unfactored imposed point load of 1.5kN applied at a height of 1.5m. Assume a deflection ratio of span/360. -Wind load: Basic wind speed, Vb= Refer Structural Engineer's information. -Site terrain: Refer Structural Engineer’s Specification. -Hr, the reference height in m Refer Structural Engineer's information. -Topography is not to be significant -Site Altitude=Refer Structural Engineer's information. Wind Pressures: Dynamic wind pressure, qs: in kN/m2 Refer Structural Engineer's information. Wind pressure: in kN/m2 Refer Structural Engineer's information. Suction Zones: (>4.56m to a building corner) (<4.56m to a building corner) Refer Structural Engineer's information. Deflection Ratios: L/500 to be used for studs laterally supporting a brickwork outer leaf as recommended by the SCI. L/360 to be used for studs supporting render system. Generally all deflection heads to Ayrshire Design. Maximum Heights: Refer Architectural Sections. - Studs: Refer plans and Wall types drawings. 150mm to Ayrshire Design. Floor and Head Channels to Manufacturer's recommendations. - Thermal Insulation: Refer Wall Type Drawings - Deflection Head: To Manufacturer's design. - Fixings: To Manufacturer's recommendations - Lining: Refer Wall Type Detail drawings - Fixing: to Manufacturer's recommendations. Project Structural Engineer: Steven Davies Kier Services | Workplace Services | Exchange Station, Tithebarn Street, Liverpool, L2 2QP Switchboard: 0151 600 5500 Email: [email protected]

COLD FORMED MATERIALS

170 COLD-FORMED GALVANIZED STEEL As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification

� Manufacturer: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Product reference: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification.

� Material: Galvanized steel sheet to BS EN 10326. - Thickness: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Designation: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification.

FABRICATION

180 NOTIFICATION OF COMMENCEMENT

G10


� Give notice: Before fabrication is due to start. - Period of notice (minimum): Five working days.

190 MARKING

� Identifying and recording materials and components: Submit details of proposed methods.

� Location of marks: - Generally: Visible for checking after erection. - Weathering steel: On surfaces not exposed to open view in the completed work.

� Steel to be blast cleaned, pickled, metal sprayed or galvanized: Marked so that subsequent treatment cannot obliterate the marking.

195 HARD STAMPING

� Usage: Not permitted except as indicated on drawings.

200 FAYING SURFACES FOR HIGH-STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP (HSFG) JOINTS

� Steel 25 mm thick or over: Check faying surfaces for deformities that may reduce slip factor to below design limit.

� Remedial measures: Submit proposals.

210 END CONNECTIONS

� Angle cleats: Project 10 mm beyond ends of simply supported members.

215 HOLLOW SECTIONS

� Insides of sections: Debris and moisture removed before sealing ends and openings.

220 ACCESS/ VENTILATION HOLES IN BASE PLATES

� Base plates larger than 1 m²: Make 25 mm diameter holes as necessary for pressure grouting, escape of entrapped air or direct compaction of filling/ bedding material.

225 STEELWORK TO BE GALVANIZED

� Cutting, drilling and shop welding: Complete before galvanizing. � Vent and drain holes: Provide as necessary.

- Locations: Submit proposals. - Sealing: Refer to Structural Engineer’s specification G10.

235 SHOP INSPECTION

� Give notice: Before fabricating Architecturally sensitive steelwork, and shall include exposed steel. - Period of notice (minimum): Five working days.

WELDING

255 SITE WELDING � Usage: Permitted only where indicated on drawings. � Working conditions: Suitable and safe. Do not weld when surfaces are wet or when

ambient temperature is below 0°C.

270 ADDITIONAL WELDS

� Welds (including tack welds) not indicated on drawings: Not permitted without approval.

G10


290 FINISHED WELDS

� Finished welds: Carefully dressed to remove slag without deforming surface of weld.

BOLT ASSEMBLIES

302 NON-PRELOADED BOLT/ SCREW ASSEMBLIES � Designation: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause 150. � Nuts and washers: To suit grade of bolt, as NSSS, clause 2.7. � Coating applied by manufacturer: To be determined by Light Steel Framing

Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

303 PRELOADED BOLT ASSEMBLIES

� Designation: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

� Coating applied by manufacturer: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

304 PROPRIETARY BOLT ASSEMBLIES

� Manufacturer: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150. - Product reference: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

305 PROPRIETARY ANCHORS

� Manufacturer: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150. - Product reference: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

� Anchor type: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

� Material: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150 .

310 ANCHORAGES TO CONCRETE

� Design standard: To ETAG 001, Annex C. � Anchor type: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause 150. Submit proposals to Project Structural Engineer for clearance for construction.

� Material: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150. - Coating applied by manufacturer: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as Clause 150.

� Concrete: - Grade: Refer Section E of NBS Spec. - Condition: Refer Section E of NBS Spec.

� Characteristic resistances of single anchor remote from edge of concrete (minimum): - Tension: Refer Section E of NBS Spec. - Shear: Refer Section E of NBS Spec.

� Fixing in concrete: Refer Section E of NBS Spec.

G10


315 HOLDING DOWN SYSTEMS � Bolts:

- Standard: To BS 7419. - Type: Hexagonal headed. - Grade: 4.6. - Diameter: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause 150. - Coating: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause 150. � Bolt boxes: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause 150. � Anchorage: To be determined by Light Steel Framing Manufacturer/ supplier as

Clause150. � Other requirements: Provide 'keep flat' welded to underside of anchorage to prevent

bolt rotation during tightening.

316 HOLDING DOWN SYSTEMS TO STEEL FRAME � Bolts:

- Standard: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Type: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Grade: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Diameter: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. - Coating: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification.

� Bolt boxes: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. � Anchorage: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification. � Other requirements: As structural Engineers Drawings and Specification.

325 DIRECT TENSION INDICATORS

� Standard: To BS 7644-1. � Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Contractor's choice. � Grade: Appropriate for grade of bolt and nut assembly. � Finish: As supplied. � Ancillary components: Washers to BS 7644-2. Used as recommended in BS 7644-

1, Annex A. � Post installation and inspection treatment: Where no further protective coating is

specified, apply a butyl rubber sealing compound to seal measuring gap around indicators.

335 SPRING WASHERS

� Standard: To BS 4464.

370 GALVANIZED COATING TO BOLT ASSEMBLIES � Standard: To BS 7371-6. � Galvanizing: Applied by fastener manufacturer. Passivated and lubricated if no

additional coatings are specified. Nuts tapped after galvanizing. � Use/location: All shop and site connections in shop painted steelwork.

375 SHERARDIZED COATING TO BOLT ASSEMBLIES � Standard: To BS 7371-8.

- Class: S1. � Sherardizing: Applied by fastener manufacturer and passivated. � Post treatment: Zinc phosphated (passivated). � Use/location: All shop and site connections in shop painted steelwork.

G10


380 ZINC PLATED FINISH TO BOLT ASSEMBLIES

� Standard: To BS 7371-3 or BS EN ISO 4042. � Zinc plating: Applied by fastener manufacturer. Clear passivated if no additional

coatings are specified. Nuts tapped after plating. � Use/location: All shop and site connections in shop painted steelwork.

390 SEALED HOLLOW SECTIONS

� Bolt holes: Sealed to prevent access of moisture. - Method of sealing: Submit proposals.

ERECTION

410 PRE-ERECTION CHECKS

� Scope: At least 7 days before proposed erection start date, check the following:

- Foundations and other structures to which steelwork will be attached: Accuracy of setting out. - Holding down bolts: Position, protruding length, slackness and condition.

� Inaccuracies and defects: Report without delay. � Permission to commence erection: Obtain.

420 SETTING OUT

� Permissible deviations: In addition to the requirements of the NSSS, comply with the following:

� Type of dimension and location Permissible Deviation Refer Structural Engineer's Spec. . Refer Structural Engineer's Spec.

432 TEMPORARY SUPPORT

� Elements to be supported: Steel Frame until roof sheeting / profiled floor deck, providing diaphram bracing is fixed in place.

� Bracing/Restraints: Provide as necessary until permanent connection can be made to Sub-contractors Design.

� Forces and moments in elements: Subcontractors Design.

TESTING

470 SITE TESTING OF ANCHORS TO MASONRY � Standard: To BS 5080. � Preliminary tests: TBA No. tests for shear loading to failure in locations that will be

hidden in completed structure. � Proof tests: Test TBA% of working fixings to TBA times the working load. � Test results: Report failures and seek instructions.

475 PRODUCTS

� Steel: Submit test certificates.

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

521 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURERS � Short list of manufacturers: Obtain coating materials from one only of the following:

Leigh's or Nullifire or equivalent. � Selected manufacturer: Submit details before ordering materials.

G10


523 COMPATIBILITY OF SHOP PRIMER WITH SITE APPLIED INTUMESCENT COATING � Intumescent coating: M61/ -. � Primer: Compatible with coating under general and fire conditions. � Manufacturer's recommendations and test evidence: Submit before priming. Include

fire test data to BS 476-20 and -21, or BS EN 1363-1 and BS EN 1365-2, -3, and/or -4 as appropriate.

535 INSPECTION OF COATING WORK

� Work in progress: Permit coating manufacturer to inspect and take samples of products.

� Notice: Give notice of dates for: - Start of surface preparation and coating. - Coated members or components leaving the works. - Period of notice (minimum): 5 working days.

610 GALVANIZING TO CHEMICALLY CLEANED STEEL

� Use/ location: All external exposed steelwork . � Preparation: Chemical cleaning. � Galvanizing: To BS EN ISO 1461.

- Minimum mean coating thickness: 85 micrometres.

638 SHOP PRIMING FOR - FOR INTUMESCENT COATING SYSTEM M61 � Use/ location: as indicated on drawings. � Shop preparation: Blast cleaning to BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa 2½. � Primer: Leighs Paints or similar as clause 523 .

- Manufacturer: as recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer. Product reference: as recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer. - Dry film thickness: 50 microns.

� Special requirements: Stripe intermediate coat to external angles.

PREPARATION FOR PAINTING

710 OFFSITE PREPARATION AND PAINTING � Working area: Covered and properly lit, heated and ventilated. � Sequence of working: Select from the following and submit proposals:

- Fabricate, blast clean, prime. - Blast clean, fabricate, remove flash rust with a light overall sweep blast, prime. - Blast clean, apply weldable prefabrication primer, fabricate, prime.

� Prefabrication primer (option 3): Type recommended by manufacturer of post fabrication primer. - Thickness of post fabrication primer coat: May be reduced if and as recommended by manufacturer.

� Surfaces inaccessible after assembly: Apply full treatment and coating system including, if necessary, local application of site coatings.

725 MANUAL CLEANING OF NEW STEELWORK

� Preparation: Remove fins, burrs, sharp edges, weld spatter, loose rust and loose scale.

� Surface finish: Clean but unpolished to BS EN ISO 8501-1, grade St 2. � Finishing: Thoroughly degrease and clean down. Remove any consequent rusting

back to grade St 2. Prime without delay.

G10


730 PREPARATION FOR SITE WELDING OF SHOP PAINTED STEELWORK � Method: Select from the following:

- Mask weld areas immediately after blast cleaning and before coating steelwork. If paint system comprises more than one coat, step each coat 30 mm back from edge of preceding coat and away from masked areas. Remove masking immediately before welding. - Prepare and paint steelwork including weld areas. Grind off to bare steel around each weld area immediately before welding.

735 TREATMENT OF SITE WELDED JOINTS IN PAINTED STEELWORK

� Preparation: After welding, and without delay, remove scale and weld spatter from weld areas. Remove traces of rust. Wash with clean water and allow to dry. Prime without delay.

� Protective/ Decorative coatings: Apply to weld areas to match surrounding painted areas.

736 TREATMENT OF SITE WELDED JOINTS IN GALVANIZED STEELWORK

� Preparation: After welding, and without delay, remove scale and weld spatter from weld areas. Remove traces of rust. Wash with clean water and allow to dry.

� Coating: Reinstate using one of the methods given in BS EN ISO 1461, clause 6.3. 740 BOLTED JOINTS (OTHER THAN FRICTION GRIP JOINTS)

� Steelwork to be shop painted: Apply full shop specification to joint faces. � Steelwork to be erected with mill finish then site painted: Before erection, prepare

and prime joint faces and allow to dry. � Bolted joints in externally exposed steelwork:

- Immediately before assembling, apply a further coat of primer and bring surfaces together while still wet. - After assembling and before applying site coatings, seal crevices to bolts and joint perimeters with a compatible sealant.

745 FAYING SURFACES OF FRICTION GRIP JOINTS

� Protection: Immediately after blast cleaning and before coating surrounding areas, mask faying surfaces to protect from contamination and deterioration. - Paint systems comprising more than one coat: Step each coat 30 mm back from edge of preceding coat and away from masked areas.

� Removal of protection: Immediately before bolting, remove masking. Check faying surfaces are free from adhesive. Clean with solvent if necessary.

750 FRICTION GRIP JOINTS IN SHOP PAINTED STEELWORK

� Post assembly treatment of bolts and surrounding areas: After final tightening of bolts and inspection of joints: - Thoroughly degrease and clean uncoated areas including bolts. - Prime without delay. - Apply full shop coating specification.

� Direct tension indicators: Seal measuring gap to prevent ingress of moisture.

755 UNCOATED FASTENERS

� Treatment: After steelwork erection and before applying site coatings, thoroughly degrease and clean. Without delay, coat to match adjacent shop painted areas.

G10


760 GALVANIZED FASTENERS � Treatment: After steelwork erection and before applying site coatings, thoroughly

degrease and clean. Etch prime.

765 SITE PREPARATION OF SHOP PAINTED STEELWORK

� Preparation: Touch in shop coats, as necessary, and allow to dry. Before applying site coats (when specified), abrade surfaces or wash down or both, as recommended by paint manufacturer.

770 SITE PREPARATION OF GALVANIZED SURFACES FOR PAINTING � Preparation: Thoroughly degrease. Remove white corrosion products. Wash off and

allow to dry before applying etching wash or primer. PAINTING

810 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS � General requirements prior to starting coating work:

- Surfaces: Unaffected by moisture or frost. - Steel temperature: At least 3°C above dew point, with conditions stable or improving, and not high enough to cause blistering or wrinkling of the coating. - Relative humidity: Below 85%.

815 COATINGS

� Surfaces to be coated: Clean, dust free and suitably dry. Previous coats to be adequately cured.

� Multiple coats of same material: Use different tints to assist checking of complete coverage.

� Penultimate coat: Colour recommended by paint manufacturer to suit top coat colour.

� Finish required: Smooth and even, of uniform thickness and colour, free from defects.

820 FILM THICKNESS

� Wet film thickness: During application, check thickness of each coat with a wheel or comb gauge used in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808.

� Accumulated dry film thickness: After each coat has dried, check total accumulated film thickness. - Method: Magnetic or electromagnetic meter. - Number and position of measurements: As directed. - Validation: Measurements to be independently witnessed. - Meter calibration: Check against standard shims and recalibrate regularly against a smooth steel reference plate.

� Average dry film thickness: - At least specified thickness over any square metre. - No reading to be less than 75% of specified thickness.

� Top coat dry film thickness: Sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque appearance.

825 STRIPE COAT

� External angles, nuts, bolt heads, rough weld seams, and areas difficult to coat: Apply an additional stripe coat of primer Polysiloxane applied at 50 microns d.f.t.

G10


850 JUNCTIONS WITH CONCRETE � Exposed steelwork partially embedded or encased in concrete: Apply two coats of

bituminous coating locally to the steel/concrete junction. � Bituminous coating: To BS 6949, type 1, class A

G20


G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

G20


G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions. TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S SPECIFICATION WHICH IS TO TAKE PRECEDENCE

GENERAL

105 TIMBER PROCUREMENT

� Timber (including timber for wood based products): Obtained from well managed forests/plantations in accordance with: - The laws governing forest management in the producer country or countries. - International agreements such as the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES).

� Documentation: Provide either: - Documentary evidence (which has been or can be independently verified) regarding the provenance of all timber supplied, or - Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing a formal environmental purchasing policy for timber and wood based products.

150 STRENGTH GRADING OF TIMBER � Grader: A company currently registered under a third party quality assurance

scheme operated by a certification body approved by the UK Timber Grading Committee.

� 160 GRADING AND MARKING OF SOFTWOOD

� Timber of a target/ finished thickness less than 100 mm and not specified for wet exposure: Graded at an average moisture content not exceeding 20% with no reading being in excess of 24% and clearly marked as 'DRY' or 'KD' (kiln dried).

� Timber graded undried (green) and specified for installation at higher moisture contents: Clearly marked as 'WET' or 'GRN'.

� Structural timber members cut from large graded sections: Regraded to approval and marked accordingly.

PRODUCTS

210 STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD (GRADED DIRECT TO STRENGTH CLASS) FOR STRUCTURAL USE GENERALLY

� Grading standard: To BS 4978, BS EN 14081-1, or other national equivalent and so marked.

� Strength class to BS EN 338: C16 Unless noted otherwise on drawings. � Treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and Wood Protection

Association Commodity Specification C8, Service life: 40 years.

WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

401 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND HARDWOOD � Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are target

sizes as defined in BS EN 336.

G20


� Tolerances: The tolerance indicators (T1) and (T2) specify the maximum permitted deviations from target sizes as stated in BS EN 336, clause 4.3: - Tolerance class 1 (T1) for sawn surfaces. - Tolerance class 2 (T2) for further processed surfaces.

420 WARPING OF TIMBER � Bow, spring, twist and cup: Not greater than the limits set down in BS 4978 or BS

EN 14081-1 for softwood, or BS 5756 for hardwood. 430 SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER

� Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits permitted by their grading: Do not use.

� Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects such that the strength of members will not be reduced.

� Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without approval. 440 PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER

� Cutting and machining: Carry out as much as possible before treatment. � Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed,

planed, ploughed, etc. � Surfaces exposed by minor cutting/ drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution

recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer. 450 MOISTURE CONTENT

� Moisture content of wood and wood based products at time of installation: Not more than: - Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%. - Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%. - Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%.

451 MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING

� Procedure: When instructed, test timber sections with an approved electrical moisture meter.

� Test sample: Test 5% but not less than 10 lengths of each cross-section in the centre of the length.

� Test results: 90% of values obtained to be within the specified range. Provide records of all tests.

510 PROTECTION

� Generally: Keep timber dry and do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or components during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.

� Timber and components: Store under cover, clear of the ground and with good ventilation. Support on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry, firm base. Open pile to ensure free movement of air through the stack.

� Trussed rafters: Keep vertical during handling and storage.

JOINTING TIMBER

570 JOINTING/FIXING GENERALLY

� Generally: Where not specified precisely, select methods of jointing and fixing and types, sizes and spacings of fasteners in compliance with section Z20.

630 BOLTED JOINTS

� Bolt spacings (minimum): To BS 5268-2, table 81.

G20


� Holes for bolts: Located accurately and drilled to diameters as close as practical to the nominal bolt diameter and not more than 2 mm larger.

� Washers: Placed under bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise bear directly on timber. Use spring washers in locations which will be hidden or inaccessible in the completed building.

� Bolt tightening: So that washers just bite the surface of the timber. Ensure that at least one complete thread protrudes from the nut. - Checking: At agreed regular intervals up to Completion. Tighten as necessary.

670 ANTICORROSION FINISHES FOR FASTENERS

� Galvanizing: To BS 7371-6, with internal threads tapped and lightly oiled following treatment.

� Sherardizing: To BS 7371-8, Class 1. � Zinc plating: To BS EN ISO 4042 and passivated.

ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

710 PROPOSALS FOR ERECTING STRUCTURAL TIMBER

� Proposals: Submit details of: - Method and sequence of erection. - Type of cranage. - Temporary guys and bracing proposed for use during erection.

� Latest date for submission: 10 Days before erection.

740 PRE-ERECTION CHECKING � Timing: Not less than 10 days before proposed erection start date. � Checklist:

- Foundations and other structures to which timber structure will be attached: Check for accuracy of setting out. - Holding down bolts: Check for position, protruding length, condition and slackness.

� Inaccuracies and defects: Report without delay. � Erection: Obtain permission to commence.

750 MODIFICATIONS/REPAIRS

� Defects due to detailing or fabrication errors: Report without delay. � Methods of rectification: Obtain approval of proposals before starting modification or

remedial work. � Defective/damaged components: Timber members/ components may be rejected if

the nature and/or number of defects would result in an excessive amount of site repair.

760 TEMPORARY BRACING � Provision: As necessary to maintain structural timber components in position and to

ensure complete stability during construction.

770 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS � Provision: Position and fix additional studs, noggings and/ or battens to support

edges of sheets materials, and wall/ floor/ ceiling mounted appliances, fixtures, etc. shown on drawings

� Material properties: Additional studs, noggings and battens to be of adequate size and have the same treatment, if any, as adjacent timber supports.

G20


775 BEARINGS � Timber surfaces which are to transmit loads: Finished to ensure close contact over

the whole of the designed bearing area. � Packings: Where provided, to cover the whole of the designed bearing area.

- Crushing strength: Not less than timber being supported. - In external locations: Rot and corrosion proof.

780 WALL PLATES

� Position and alignment: To give the correct span and level for trusses, joists, etc. � Bedding: Fully in fresh mortar. � Joints: At corners and elsewhere where joints are unavoidable use nailed half lap

joints. Do not use short lengths of timber.

784 JOISTS GENERALLY � Centres: Equal, and not exceeding designed spacing. � Bowed joists: Installed with positive camber. � End joists: Positioned approximately 50 mm from masonry walls.

786 JOISTS ON HANGERS � Hangers: Bedded directly on and hard against supporting construction. Do not use

packs or bed on mortar. � Joists: Cut to leave not more than 6 mm gap between ends of joists and back of

hanger. � Rebated to lie flush with underside of hangers. � Fixing to hangers: A nail in every hole.

790 STANDARD JOIST HANGERS Locations see drawings. � Standard: To BS EN 845-1. � Size and type: To suit joist, design load and crushing strength of supporting

construction. � Material/ finish: Galvanized low carbon steel.

795 TRIMMING OPENINGS � Trimmers and trimming joists: When not specified otherwise, not less than 25 mm

wider than general joists.

830 LATERAL RESTRAINT STRAPS See drawings for locations � Manufacturer: Contractors choice. � Product reference: Contractors choice. � Material/ finish: Galvanized steel. � Size: Not less than 30 x 5 mm cross section, 150 mm cranked end and length to

suit. � Fixing: To top of joists/ rafters/ ties at not more than 1.2 m centres and as shown on

drawings. - Ensure that cranked end is in tight contact with cavity face of wall inner leaf and is not pointing upwards.

� Straps spanning joists/ rafter/ ties running parallel to wall: Fix noggings and packs tightly beneath straps. - Size of noggings and packs: Not less than three quarters of joist/ rafter/ tie depth and not less than 38 mm thick. - Notching: Notch joists so that straps fit flush with surface. Do not notch rafters/ ties.

� Fasteners: No less than four 50mmx8mm gauge sherardized countersunk screws per strap, evenly spread.

H11


H11 Cladding/Covering

H11


H11 CURTAIN WALLING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

110 CURTAIN WALLING TO EXTERNAL FACADES AS INDICATED ON THE ELEVATIONS

• Supporting structure: Structural Steelwork . • Curtain walling system: - Manufacturer: Kawneer UK Ltd., Runcorn, Cheshire or equivalent. Product reference: Kawneer AA 100 50mm Curtan Wall System or equivalent. . - Type: Stick system, drained and ventilated. . • Internal framing member: - Material: Aluminium . - Finish: Powder coating . Colour/ texture: RAL TO BE CONFIRMED. Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres . • External cover cap: - Material: Aluminium . - Finish: Powder coating . Colour/ texture: RAL TO BE CONFIRMED 30% gloss . Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres . • Glazing: Solar control double glazed units incorporating low emissivity glass and argon filing.

Overall sound reduction of Rw32, g values of 0.28 in a southerly, eastern and western orientations. Northern orientation 0.64.

- Inner pane: 6.8 Laminated glass - Outer pane: 6mm thermally toughened glass .

• Glazing system: Gaskets, cover plate fixed . • Panel/ facing type: Composite infill panels, external cover plate fixed . - External material: Aluminium sheet . - External finish: Powder coating . - Internal material: Aluminium sheet . - Internal finish: Powder coating . - Core insulation: To achieve thermal model U value calculations. • Accessories: Perimeter flashings.

• Incorporated components: Doors and opening lights as shown on the elevations. . • Other requirements: To achieve thermal model 1.2 W/M2K U value calculations.

150 MATERIALS SPECIFICATION:

• Minimum 'BRE Green Guide to Specification Online' rating: A.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN

• Curtain walling and associated features: Complete the detailed design. Submit before commencement of fabrication.

• Related works: Coordinate in the detailed design.

215 DESIGN PROPOSALS

• Alternative proposals: Preliminary design drawings indicate intent. Other reasonable proposals will be considered.

H11


220 SPECIFICATION

• Compliance standard: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) ‘Standard for systemised building envelopes.

• Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep at the design office, workshop and on site copies of:

− The CWCT “Standard for systemised building envelopes”

− Publications invoked by the CWCT “Standard for systemised building envelopes”

30 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN STAGE

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:

− A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.

− A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the structure.

− Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction. − A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master

programme.

− A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme.

− Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or

− relaxations.

232 QUALITY PLAN

• Requirement: Submit during detailed design. • Content: In accordance with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the

following:-

− Name of the Quality Manager.

− Quality assessment procedures. − Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.

− Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists. − List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off

site and on site.

− List of product information with latest revisions.

− Subcontractors involved in the work. − Subcontractors’ quality plans.

− Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures. − Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances. − Maintenance procedures and calibration records.

− Certification that completed work complies with specification. − Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non compliances discharged.

235 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING OR

FABRICATION OF CURTAIN WALLING

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:

− Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation. − Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance

requirements.

− Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.

− Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability for proposed locations in the curtain walling.

− Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.

− Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

240 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF STRUCTURAL

H11


SEALANT GLAZING:

• Submit structural bonding sealant manufacturer's project specific approval for:

− Compatibility and adhesion of products and finishes.

− Full details of structural sealant glazing design. − Structural sealant dimensions.

− Project specific sealant application method statement.

250 PRODUCT SAMPLES

• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of Curtainwall System.

260 SAMPLES OF FIXINGS

• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing anchor, including casting-in restraints and shims, together with manufacturers’ recommended torque figures.

270 FABRICATION SAMPLES

• General: During detailed design, submit samples of material.

− Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

280 MOCK-UP:

• General: Construct during detailed design work in an approved location. Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding. Retain undisturbed until completion of curtain walling installation.

• Extent: New Technology Building. • Purpose: As a sample area to agree standard for the rest of the project.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 CWCT ‘STANDARD FOR SYSTEMSIED BUILDING ENVELOPES’

• General: unless specified or agreed otherwise comply with: • Part 2 – Loads, Fixings and Movement

• Part 3 – Air, Water & Wind Resistance

• Part 4 – Operable components, additional elements & means of access.

• Part 5 – Thermal, moisture & acoustic performance • Part 6 – Fire performance

• Part 7 – Robustness, durability, tolerances & workmanship. • Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in

conjunction with CWCT performance criteria.

312 INTEGRITY

• Requirement: The curtain walling must resist wind loads, dead loads and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and movements without damage.

• Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2, Standard Method:

− Max. wind pressure: 0.875 kN/m2

− Max. wind suction: 1.3 kN/m2

• Hard Body Impact Loads

− Location & Category: TBC • Soft Body Impact Loads – Curtain Walling to BS EN 14019

− Location & Classification:

• Soft Body Impact Loads – Glass to BS EN 12600

− Location & Classification:

H11


320 DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS

• Requirement: Framing members parallel to the curtain-walling plane must not: − Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of design dimension.

− Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately adjacent glazing units, panel/ facing units or other fixed units.

− Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable components such as doors and windows.

325 DEFLECTION UNDER WIND LOADS

• Requirement: to CWCT “Standard for systemised building envelopes” clause 3.5.2 and the following additional requirements

• Additional stiffness to CWCT “Standard for systemised building envelopes” clause 3.5.4.2

330 GENERAL MOVEMENT

• Requirement: Curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements.

332 APPEARANCE AND FIT

• Requirement: Design Curtain Walling system: − To ensure position and alignment of all parts and features as shown on

preliminary design drawings

− To accommodate deviations in the primary support structure • Primary support structure: Before commencing installation of curtain walling

system, carry out survey sufficient to verify the required accuracy of erection can be achieved

− Give notice if the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection.

335 THERMAL MOVEMENT - SERVICE TEMPERATURE RANGES:

• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 2.7.2

340 AIR PERMEABILITY

• Requirement: Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m³/hr/m² for fixed lights and 2.0 m³/hr/lin.m for opening light areas, must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure.

• Permeability class to BS EN 12152: 5.0m3 /(h.m2). − Peak Test Pressure 50Pa.

660 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING TESTS:

• Product samples: Provide the structural bonding sealant manufacturer with framing profiles, glass, gaskets, assembly/ weathering sealants and other curtain walling products that are proposed for contact with structural bonding sealant.

• Testing: By sealant manufacturer to determine compatibility and adhesion of structural bonding sealant under specified design loadings.

• Modification of product to enable compliance with test criteria: Details must be recorded in the sealant manufacturer's project specific approval.

PRODUCTS

710 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

• Standard: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020.

H11


• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish. • Structural members: To BS 8118.

712 AUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.

• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

715 CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, and BS EN 10210.

• Thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

• 717 CARBON STEEL SHEET

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 1449-1, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10111, BS EN 10131, BS EN 10132, BS EN 10139, BS EN 10140, BS EN 10149, BS EN 10209 and BS EN 10268.

• Grade and thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

720 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445

• Grade: To BS EN 10088-2, austenitic 1.4301 (304) generally, 1.4401 (316) when used externally or in severely corrosive environments.

• Thickness: Suitable for the application.

730 MECHANICAL FIXINGS

• Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506, grade A2 generally, grade A4 when used in severely corrosive environments.

• Carbon steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating. • Aluminium brackets, rivets and shear pins: To relevant parts of BS EN 755.

732 ADHESIVES

• General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

735 FIXING ANCHORS

• Type and use: Reviewed and approved by fixing manufacturers. Submit confirmatory information on request.

• Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers. • Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building

structure and curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.

737 GLASS GENERALLY

• Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:

− BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.

− BS EN 1096 for coated glass. − BS EN 1748 for borosilicate glass.

− BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.

− BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate glass.

− BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate glass. − BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass.

• Glass quality: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, ripplings, dimples, and other defects.

H11


• Glass edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.

739 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS:

• Measurement of tolerances: Before any thermal toughening/ heat strengthening. • Pane dimensions less than 1500 mm:

− For 3 to 6 mm thick glass: ± 1.0 mm.

− For 8 to 12 mm thick glass: ± 1.5 mm.

− For 15 mm thick glass: ± 2.0 mm. − For 19 mm and 25 mm thick glass: ± 2.5 mm.

• Pane dimensions more than 1500 mm:

− For 3 to 6 mm thick glass: ± 1.5 mm. − For 8 to 12 mm thick glass: ± 2.0 mm.

− For 15 mm thick glass: ± 2.5 mm. − For 19 mm and 25 mm thick glass: ± 3.0 mm.

• Pane squareness: Not more than 4 mm difference in diagonal measurements.

741 DISTORTIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS

• Measurement of tolerances: After any thermal toughening/ heat strengthening. • Maximum bow: 0.2% of pane dimension. • Maximum roller wave:

− For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm. − For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.3 mm.

− For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.15 mm.

• Maximum edge dip:

− For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.8 mm. − For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm. − For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.25 mm.

747 GLASS EDGE CONDITION FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

• Bonded, unframed outer edges: Flat ground with a small arris suitable for open jointing or for weatherseal jointing.

750 INFILL PANELS/ FACINGS

• Tolerances:

− Deviation in size (maximum): ± 1 mm. − Deviation in flatness from plane per 2 m length (maximum): ± 1 mm.

• Rigidity: Adequate to comply with design/ performance requirements.

755 NATURAL STONE INFILL PANELS/ FACINGS

• N/A

760 GASKETS

• Material: − Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.

− Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509. • Continuity: Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner

gaskets of drained and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed in a complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded corner joints.

• Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

H11


765 WEATHERSTRIPPING OF OPENING UNITS

• Material: − Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.

− Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.

− Polypropylene woven pile, silicone treated. • Attachment: Fixed in undercut grooves in framing sections using preformed

corners, with any joints in the length. 770 GENERAL SEALANTS

• Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:

− Silicone to BS 5889. − One part polysulfide to BS 5215.

− Two part polysulfide to BS 4254.

− One or two part polyurethane.

• Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600. • Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible.

772 CURTAIN WALLING JOINT ASSEMBLY SEALANTS

• Material: One part, low modulus silicone to BS EN ISO 11600, type F or G. Neutral curing where in contact with or close proximity to other products that may be adversely affected by acetoxy curing.

• Manufacturer: to match Colour to Contractor’s choice.

775 BONDING SEALANTS FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

• Material: Silicone, neutral curing, designed and manufactured for bonding of structural sealant glazing. Compatible with contact and close proximity products and finishes.

• Manufacturer: Contractor’s choice.

777 WEATHERSEALING FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

• Material: Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing. Designed and manufactured for weather sealing of structural sealant glazing. Compatible with contact and close

proximity products and finishes.

• Manufacturer: Contractor’s choice.

• Colour: To match Curtain wall.

780 THERMAL INSULATION:

• Material: Rockwool or similar approved. • Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or

water vapour.

• Fixing: Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtain walling.

785 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

• Acceptable materials:

− Aluminium alloy.

− Carbon steel, galvanized or protective coated.

− Stainless steel. − Reinforced membranes: Foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid

facings/linings.

• Location: Warm side of thermal insulation. • Integrity: Continuous, free from gaps and sealed at joints.

H11


FINISHES

810 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/

REINFORCEMENT

• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:

− Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

− An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713.

820 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS

• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:

− Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

− Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated. − Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation Fe//Zn//C for an iridescent

(yellow passivate) chromate conversion coating or Fe//Zn//D for an opaque (olive green) chromate conversion coating.

830 POWDER COATING

• Requirement: As section Z31.

840 ANODISING

• Requirement: As section Z33. 850 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOY:

• Standard: To BS 4842, AAMA 2604-05 or AAMA 2605-05, subject to minimum coating thicknesses recommended by the manufacturer on significant surfaces.

− Applicator: TBC. Product reference: TBC.

• PVDF resin content of coatings: Not less than 70%. • Process: Prepare base metals, prime, PVDF coat, test samples, protect

components and repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Sequence: Wherever possible, apply coatings after fabrication is complete.

• Fabrication of prefinished lengths: Submit proposals beforehand. Uncoated edges: Invisible in completed assemblies.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

910 GENERALLY

• Electrolytic corrosion: Prevent. Submit proposed methods.

• Fixings: Concealed unless indicated on detailed drawings. Where exposed they must match material and finish of the products fixed.

• Fabrication: Machine cut and drill products in the workshop wherever possible.

• Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly, handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the completed installation.

912 METALWORK

• Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

915 GLAZING

• Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section. • Directional patterned/ wired glass: Generally fix parallel to surround and align

adjacent

H11


panes where seen together at close quarters.

917 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION


920 SEALANT APPLICATION


925 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

• Curing: Do not transport units until structural bonding sealant has adequately cured for the period stated in the project specific approval.

930 ASSEMBLY

• General: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop. • Joints (other than movement joints): Rigidly secured, reinforced where necessary

and fixed with hairline abutments.

• Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for reassembly on site.

955 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION

• Site drilling or cutting into structure: Submit proposals for positions other than shown on detailed drawings.

• Concrete supporting structure:

− Cast-in inserts: Provide detailed locational information. Protect cavities in inserts from entry of concrete.

− Edge fixing distances: Not less than recommended by fixing anchor manufacturers.

• Corrective fabrication: Minimize. Where necessary, submit proposals.

965 PRELIMINARY CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION:

• Requirement: Complete an area for inspection and approval of appearance as follows:

− Part façade of Technology Building.

970 CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION

• Securing to fixing anchors: Through holes formed during fabrication only.

• Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque figures. Do not overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement.

• Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and from surfaces that will be inaccessible on completion.

975 WELDING

• In situ welding: TBC.

980 INTERFACES

• Flashings, closers, etc: Locate and form correctly to provide weathertight junctions with the curtain walling.

982 IRONMONGERY

• Assembly and fixing: Accurately, using fasteners with matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.

• Completion: Check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

H11


985 MAINTENANCE

• Maintenance manual: Incorporate details within the Building Manual in accordance with

CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 7.6.1.

− Materials certification and test reports to be included.

− Contact details for subcontractors and suppliers.

− Design criteria for the curtain wall system. − Product information for components and materials including manufacturers’

literature, COSHH data sheets and recommendations for cleaning maintenance and repair.

− Copies of material, components and finishes certification and test report

− A full set of construction drawings, updated to include any changes made up to the time of completion.

− The terms and conditions of any guarantee. − Method statement for means of access for maintenance and for use of any

permanent equipment.

− Method statement covering the procedures for replacement of parts that have a design life less than the design life of the curtain wall system.

− Recommendations for routine maintenance and cleaning, including suitable cleaning agents and lubrication/ adjustments to working parts.

− Record book for listing defects, maintenance and repairs.

H71


H71

Lead sheet coverings/ flashings

H71


H71 Lead sheet coverings/ flashings


TYPES OF LEADWORK

470 MISCELLANEOUS COVER FLASHING TO SVP/FLUE PENETRATIONS AND AT HORIZONTAL ABUTMENTS

� Lead: - Thickness: 1.75-2.00 mm (code 4).

- Finish: Fully coated on both sides with high-build, bitumen based paint on the surfaces which are to be embedded.

� Length: Not more than 1500 mm. � Cover of flashing: Not less than 150 mm. � Joints: Leadweld gusset upstand not less than 100 mm from end of each length,

coinciding with vertical mortar joint in wall. Lap adjoining length over gusset upstand.

� Laying: On a thin even bed of wet mortar. - Next layer of overlying construction: Bed on mortar without delay and finish joint

neatly. � Fixing cover flashing: With clips at laps and at 500 mm centres.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

510 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY � Standard: To BS 6915 and latest edition of 'Rolled lead sheet. The complete

manual' published by the Lead Sheet Association. � Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely

weathertight installation. � Operatives: Trained in the application of lead coverings/ flashings. Submit records

of experience on request. � Preforming: Measure, mark, cut and form lead prior to assembly wherever possible. � Marking out: With pencil, chalk of crayon. Do no use scribers or other sharp

instruments without approval. � Bossing and forming: Straight and regular bends, leaving sheets free from ripples,

kinks, buckling and cracks. � Solder: Use only where specified. � Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds. � Finished work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift but also able to

accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress. - Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works.

516 LEADWELDING � In situ leadwelding: Is permitted, subject to completion of a ‘hot work permit' form

and compliance with its requirements.

520 LEAD SHEET � Production method: - Rolled, to BS EN 12588, or - Machine cast, Agrément certified and to code thicknesses with a tolerance (by

weight) of ±5%, or - Sand cast, from lead free from bitumen, solder, other impurities, inclusions,

laminations, cracks, air, pinholes and blowholes; to code thicknesses but with a tolerance (by weight) of ±10%.

H71


� Identification: Labelled to show thickness/ code, weight and type.

555 LAYOUT � Setting out of longitudinal and cross joints: Submit proposals. - Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works. � Production method:

− Rolled, to BS EN 12588, or

− Machine cast, Agrément certified and to code thicknesses with a tolerance (by weight) of ±5%, or

− Sand cast, from lead free from bitumen, solder, other impurities, inclusions, laminations, cracks, air, pinholes and blowholes; to code thicknesses but with a tolerance (by weight) of ±10%.

� Identification: Labelled to show thickness/ code, weight and type.

560 CONTROL SAMPLES � General: Complete areas of the finished work, and obtain approval of appearance

before proceeding: � Size: Contractor's choice. � Location: cowl apron for Clerk of Works approval.

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES � Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.

620 PREPARATION OF EXISTING TIMBER SUBSTRATES • Remedial work: Adjust boards to level and securely fix. Punch in protruding

fasteners and plane or sand to achieve an even surface. • Defective boards: Give notice. • Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater than

16%.

630 PLYWOOD UNDERLAY • Standard: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,

section 7 (plywood for use in humid conditions). • Sheet size: 2400 or 1200 x 1200 mm and 6 mm thick. • Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater than

16%. • Laying: Cross joints staggered and a 0.5 to 1 mm gap between boards. • Fixing: With 25 mm annular ringed shank copper or stainless steel nails, at 300 mm

grid centres over the area of each sheet and at 150 mm centres along edges, set in 10 mm from perimeter edges.

− Nail heads: Set flush or just below the surface.

640 TIMBER FOR USE WITH LEADWORK • Quality: Planed, free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (ambrosia

beetle excepted). • Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of fixing and covering. Give notice if

greater than 16%. • Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and British Wood Preserving

and Damp-proofing Association Manual - Commodity Specification C8.

FIXING LEAD

710 FIXINGS • Nails to timber substrates: Copper clout nails to BS 1202-2, or stainless steel

(austenitic) clout nails to BS 1202-1.

H71


− Shank type: Annular ringed, helical threaded or serrated. − Shank diameter: Not less than 2.65 mm for light duty or 3.35 mm for heavy duty.

− Length: Not less than 20 mm or equal to substrate thickness. • Screws to concrete or masonry substrates: Brass or stainless steel to BS 1210,

tables 3 or 4.

− Diameter: Not less than 3.35 mm. − Length: Not less than 19 mm.

− Washers and plastic plugs: Compatible with screws and lead. − Screws to composite metal decks: Self tapping as recommended by the deck and

lead manufacturer/ supplier for clips. 715 CLIPS

� Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. � Material:

− Lead clips: Cut from sheets of same thickness/ code as sheet being secured. − Copper clips:

− Thickness: 0.70 mm. − Temper: BS EN 1172, designation R220 in welts, seams and rolls, R240

elsewhere; dipped in solder if exposed to view.

− Stainless steel clips: � Grade: BS EN 10088, 1.4301(304) terne coated if exposed to view. � Dimensions:

− Width: 50 mm where not continuous. − Length: To suit detail.

� Fixing clips: Secure each to substrate with either two screw or three nail fixings not more than 50mm from edge of lead sheet. Use additional fixings where lead downstands exceed 75 mm.

� Fixing lead sheet: Welt clips around edges and turn over 25 mm.

770 WEDGE FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES � Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm. � Lead: Dress into joint/chase.

− Fixing: Lead wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of irection and with at

− least two for each piece of lead. � Sealant: Contractor's choice.

− Application: As section Z22.

790 SCREW FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES � Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm. � Lead: Dress into joint/ chase and up back face.

− Fixing: Into back face with stainless steel screws and washers and plastics plugs at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of direction, and with at least two fixings for each piece of lead.

� Sealant: Contractor's choice.

− Application: As section Z22.

JOINTING LEAD

810 FORMING DETAILS • Method: Bossing or leadwelding except where bossing is specifically required. • Leadwelded seams: Neatly and consistently formed. - Seams: Do not undercut or reduce sheet thickness. - Filler strips: Of the same composition as the sheets being joined. - Butt joints: Formed to a thickness one third more than the sheets being joined.

H71


- Lap joints: Formed with 25 mm laps and two loadings to the edge of the overlap. • Bossing: Carried out without thinning, cutting or otherwise splitting the lead

sheet. Details where bossing must be used: Not applicable

830 STANDING SEAM JOINTS • Joint allowance: 100 mm overlap, 75 mm underlap and copper or stainless steel

clips at not more than 750 mm centres. • Forming joint: Welt overlap and clips around underlap, loosely turn over to form

a standing seam of consistent cross section.

865 DRIPS WITHOUT SPLASH LAPS • Underlap: Dress into rebate along top edge of drip. - Fixing: One row of nails at 50 mm centres on centre line of rebate. • Overlap: Dress over drip to just short of lower level.

880 WELTED JOINTS • Joint allowance: 50 mm overlap and 25 mm underlap. • Copper or stainless steel clips: Fix to substrate at not more than 450 mm

centres. • Overlap: Welt around underlap and clips and lightly dress down.

970 PATINATION OIL • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Location: all leadwork. • Application: As soon as practical, apply a smear coating to lead, evenly in one

direction and in dry conditions.

H72


H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings

H72


H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions. SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE DESCRIPTIVE WORKS a) Complete the Detailed Design, supply, install and warrant the works complying with the visual intent shown on the Tender Drawings and criteria stated in the specification. b) Where no product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable materials and systems prior to Contract award which comply with the visual intent and performance criteria stated and remain fully responsible for the Detailed Design of the works. c) Where a particular product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, complete the installation using that product, or such other confirmed as acceptable by the Architect in writing, whilst remaining fully responsible for the Detailed Design of all fixings and associated works to provide a safe and warranted installation. TYPES OF ALUMINIUM WORK 250 WEATHERING TO PARAPETS/ UPSTANDS

• Substrate: SFS upstands/ galvanised steel top hat . • Underlay: Not required. • Aluminium: Coated sheet/ strip. - Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A. - Temper: H12. - Finish: Polyester Powder Coated as Z11. - Thickness: 2mm. • Joints: Open joint butt strap . - Spacing: 4 m maximum. • Edge details: Beaded drip at front, upstand at rear with tuck in. • Fixing: 2mm thick galvanised steel top hat supports. Fixings at 450 mm centres. Use TLR/Bulbtite type sealed rivets . • Other requirements: Butt joints with 150mm butt straps, Butt straps stiched and sealed to flashing.(butt strap should not return under drip flashing). -Allow for 1.5mm expansion joints for every 1 metre length of flashing. - Isolate aluminium flashings from galvanised steel supports using self-adhesive Ali -Tape PB. Tremco illbruck Limited, Bentall Business Park, Glover, Washington, Tyne & Wear NE37 3JD, Tel: 0191 419 0505 Fax: 0191 419 2200. - Fix lightning conductor strips.

420 COVER FLASHINGS ROOF OPENINGS FOR SERVICES DUCTS, ROOFLIGHTS, • Aluminium: Coated sheet/ strip. - Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A. - Temper: H12. - Finish: Polyester Powder Coated as Z11. - Thickness: 2mm. • Dimensions: - Lengths: Not more than 2 m, with end to end joints lapped not less than 100 mm. - Cover to roofing upstand: Not less than 75 mm, with bottom edge welted 15 mm. • Fixing: Aluminium stitchers, clips to bottom edge, at laps and 450 mm centres.

430 COATED ALUMINIUM STRIP/ SHEET/FASCIA – to Entrance Area Roof/ Canopy

• Manufacturer: Alumasc Aluminium Architectural Fabrications.

• ALUMASC EXTERIOR BUILDING PRODUCTS LTD White House Works, Bold Road, Sutton,

H72


St Helens, Merseyside, WA9 4JG Telephone: +44 (0)1744 648400 Website: www.alumascrainwater.co.uk E‐mail: info@alumasc‐exteriors.co.uk

- Product reference: Polyester Powder Coated Aluminium.

• Product Reference: Skyline - Aerofoil GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

510 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

• Standard: Generally to CP 143-15. • Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely weathertight installation. • Operatives: Trained in the application of aluminium coverings/ flashings. Submit records of experience on request. • Measuring, marking, cutting and forming: Prior to assembly wherever possible. • Marking out: With pencil, chalk or crayon. Do not use scribers or other sharp instruments without approval. • Folding: With mechanical or manual presses to give straight, regular and tight bends, leaving panels free from ripples, kinks, buckling and cracks. Use hand tools only for folding details that cannot be pressed. • Surface protection: Fully coat surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar with high build bitumen based paint, after folding. • Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds. • Joints: Do not use sealants to attain waterproofing. • Finished aluminium work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift and able to accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress. - Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works.

515 WELDING • In situ welding: Not permitted.

H92


H92 Rainscreen cladding

H92


H92 Rainscreen cladding To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions. TENDERING 10 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

• Submit the following cladding particulars: - Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales. - Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including Full size flashing details at window head and sill indicated on Architect's drawings . - Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, including thermal insulation . - Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed cladding. - Proposals for connections to and support from the primary support structure. - Proposals for primary support structure additional to that shown on preliminary design drawings. - Schedule of builder's work, special provisions and special attendance by others. - Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared. - Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme. - Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products. - Areas of non-compliance with specification.

110 TRESPA METEON – CLADDING PANELS AND RAINSCREEN CLADDING SYSTEM

• Manufacturer: Trespa - TRESPA UK LTD. 35 Calthorpe Road. Edgbaston. Birmingham, B15 1TS Tel: 0808-2340268. [email protected]

• Product reference: TRESPA METEON

• Thickness: 8mm • Colour: To be confirmed.

• Substrate: Metal studs SFS system as G10/150 to inner leaf of external wall. • Rainscreen cladding system:

- Manufacturer/ Installer: Vivalda Address: 99 Victoria Road, Park Royal, London, NW10 6DJ. E: [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

T: 0208 963 9999.

• Product Reference: Trespa TS200: Secret fix application of Trespa Meteon HPL rainscreen cladding facade panels using PTS fixings. TS200 consists of Macfox brackets and vertical panel profiles supporting TS200 rails/cleats. Trespa HPL panels are individually height adjustable using adjustable cleats.

• Other requirements: Vivalda to liaise with SFS System installer to coordinate supports for rainscreen cladding system. Signage to be added to the Trespa Meteon Panels. Details to be agreed and shown on Signage drawings.

111 FASTCLAD – RAINSCREEN BRICK CLADDING SYSTEM. To use with Bricks specified in F10/110

• Fastclad a factory fabricated panel system comprising 15 to 20 mm thick clay brick slips, adhesively bonded to cement-bonded particle boards to BS EN 634-1 : 1995 and BS EN 634-2 : 2007

• Fastclad is a non-structural cladding system, screw fixed to Structural Framing System (SFS) (G10/150) via timber battens.

• Timber studs centres: 400 mm.

H92


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/PREPARATORY WORK 210 DESIGN

• Rainscreen cladding system and associated features: Complete detailed design in accordance with this specification and the preliminary design drawings and submit before commencement of fabrication. • Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

215 DESIGN PROPOSALS • Submission of alternative proposals: Preliminary design drawings indicate intent. Other reasonable proposals will be considered.

220 SPECIFICATION • Compliance standards: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'. • Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep available at the design office, workshop and on site copies of:

- The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'. - Publications invoked by the CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'. 230 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

• Submit the following cladding particulars: - A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment. - A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the rainscreen cladding to the structure. - Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to the structural design and construction with methods of adjustment and tolerances. - A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances. - A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme. - A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme. - Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or relaxations. 232 QUALITY PLAN

• Requirement: Submit during detailed design. • Content: In accordance with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following: - Name of the quality manager. - Quality assessment procedures. - Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work. - Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists. - List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off site and on site. - List of product information with latest revisions. - Subcontractors involved in the work. - Subcontractors quality plans. - Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures. - Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances. - Maintenance procedures and calibration records. - Certification that completed work complies with specification. - Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non-compliances

discharged. 235 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING OR MANUFACTURE OF RAINSCREEN CLADDING SYSTEM

H92


• Submit the following cladding particulars: - Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation. - Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements. - Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements. - Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability for proposed locations in the rainscreen cladding. - Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements. - Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

250 SAMPLES OF FIXINGS

• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing, together with manufacturers' recommended torque figures.

270 MOCK-UP

• General: Construct during detailed design work in an agreed location. Satisfy purpose and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding. Retain undisturbed until completion of cladding installation. • Extent: Storey height bay of North Elevation . • Purpose: To validate incorporation of windows and corner detail and serve as an installation reference panel.

DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 310 CWCT 'STANDARD FOR SYSTEMISED BUILDING ENVELOPES'

• General: Unless specified or agreed otherwise comply with: Part 2 - Loads, fixings and movement. Part 3 - Air, water and wind resistance. Part 4 - Operable components, additional elements and means of access. Part 5 - Thermal, moisture and acoustic performance. Part 6 - Fire performance. Part 7 - Robustness, durability, tolerances and workmanship. • Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in conjunction with CWCT performance requirements.

330 INTEGRITY OF VENTILATED RAINSCREEN CLAD WALLS • Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of panels, sizes, number and spacing of fixings, configuration and location of secondary support systems and incorporation of other accessories and fittings to ensure the cladding system, primary support structure and other elements forming the rainscreen wall will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and movements without damage. • Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method appropriate to location, exposure, height, building shape, and size taking account of existing and known future adjacent structures. - Basic wind speed (Vb): Standard method. Note: Manufacturer/ supplier to work out wind loading based on Dynamic Pressure of 0.5kN/m² to BS 6399. - Altitude factor (Sa): BS 6399. - Direction factor (Sd): BS 6399. - Seasonal factor (Ss): 1. - Probability factor (Sp): 1. - Terrain and building factor (Sb): Subject to building height and in accordance with BS 6399. - External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1. - External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5. - Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): As determined from BS 6399-2, clause 2.6. - Dominant opening: None.

H92


• Hard body impact loads to BS 8200: - Location and category: Location B and C category E. • Soft body impact loads to BS EN 14019: - Location and classification: Appropriate clause for rain screen cladding. • Temporary imposed loads: None.

350 DEFLECTION UNDER WIND LOAD • Requirement: For listed components, at positive and negative applications of the design wind pressure, normal deflections are not to exceed: To BS 6399. • Additional stiffness to CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 3.5.4.2: Not allowed.

360 WIND RESISTANCE - CYCLIC LOADING

• Requirement: No reduction in the integrity of the rainscreen cladding must occur when subjected to the test sequence given in CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', clause 8.14.6. • Test method: As clause 665. - Effective wind pressure: To BS 6399.

370 APPEARANCE AND FIT • Requirement: Design rainscreen wall: - To ensure position and alignment of all parts and features as shown on preliminary design drawings. - To accommodate deviations in the primary support structure. • Primary support structure: Before commencing installation of rainscreen cladding system, carry out survey sufficient to verify that required accuracy of erection can be achieved. - Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection. - Design tolerances: As sections G10, E05 and F10. • Rainscreen envelope zone tolerances: - Width: to CWCT clause 7.4.3 and 7.4.4 for further guidance. Critical reference location: to CWCT clause 7.4.3 and 7.4.4 for further guidance. • Maximum permitted component and installation tolerances: to CWCT clause 7.4.3 and 7.4.4 for further guidance.

380 GENERAL MOVEMENT • Requirement: Rainscreen cladding must accommodate anticipated building movements as follows: CWCT clause 2.6.1 guidance .

385 THERMAL MOVEMENT - SERVICE TEMPERATURE RANGES

• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 2.7.2 amended and/ or with the addition of the following: -20°C to +80°C.

390 AIR PERMEABILITY EXFILTRATION

• Requirement: The maximum permissible air exfiltration rate through the building envelope system must not exceed: 4 m³/(h.m²) at a test pressure of 50 Pa.

430 THERMAL PROPERTIES

• Method for calculating the thermal transmittance (U-value) of the rainscreen wall: Weighted U-value. • Average U-value of rainscreen wall: Wall Type E 0.25W/m²K and Wall Type F 0.27W/m²K . • Method for assessing thermal transmittance (U-value) of assemblies: Hot box in accordance with BS 874-3, By calculation .

440 AVOIDANCE OF CONDENSATION

• Requirement: Psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form within or on the interior surface of the rainscreen wall or any surface of the wall that is on the warm

H92


side of insulation are: - Notional outdoor psychrometric conditions as BS 6229, table A1. - Notional indoor psychrometric conditions: Temperature: 20°C. Relative humidity: 50% . Dew point 9.3 C. Vapour pressure: 1.17 kPa. • Winter interstitial condensate: - Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m². - Calculated annual net retention: Nil.

450 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

• Interstitial condensation risk within rainscreen wall: Determine using the method described in BS 5250 Annex D. If necessary, provide a suitable vapour control layer to ensure that damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation does not occur.

480 FIRE RESISTANCE OF BACKING WALL TO BS 476- 21

• Minimum periods and criteria: 30 min. integrity, 30 min, insulation. 485 INTERNAL SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME OF BACKING WALL TO BS 476-7 • Class: 0. 490 CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS TO BS 476-20

• Requirement: To resist the passage of flame and smoke for not less than 60 min. integrity, 60 min. insulation.

497 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM • Rainscreen components used as part of lightning protection system: None. TESTING

510 COMPARISON (TYPE) TESTING • Verification of performance: - Submit: Certification and reports satisfying CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', clause 1.5.5 items a and b. • Commencement of fabrication and installation of rainscreen cladding: Not until test results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been submitted.

520 PROJECT TESTING (SITE) • Timing of testing: At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site arrange for testing of a section of rainscreen cladding in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification. • Continuation of installation of general areas of rainscreen cladding: Not until site test results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been submitted.

PRODUCTS 710 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

• Standards: To BS EN 755 alloy EN AW-6063 and suitable for the specified finish. • Structural members: To comply with BS 8118.

712 ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET

• Standards: To BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573. • Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

725 TIMBER BATTENS

• General: Regularized softwood free from decay, insect attack (except ambrosia beetle

H92


damage) and with no knots wider than half the width of the section. • Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing Association Commodity Specification C8. - Type: Organic solvent. • Moisture content at time of fixing (maximum): 19%.

730 MECHANICAL FIXINGS - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS • Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506 grade A2 generally, grade A4 when used in severely corrosive environments. • Carbon steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating. • Aluminium: To BS EN 755.

732 ADHESIVES • General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

735 FIXINGS AND FASTENERS

• Type and use: Reviewed and approved by manufacturers. Submit confirmatory information on request. • Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers. • Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate primary support structure and rainscreen cladding fabrication/ installation tolerances.

760 GASKETS • Material: - Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1. - Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509. • Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

770 GENERAL SEALANTS • Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from: - Silicone. - One part polysulfide. - Two part polysulfide. - One or two part polyurethane. • Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600.

• Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible. 775 THERMAL INSULATION

• Material: Refer P10 - Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water vapour. • Fixing: Attached to the outer face or supported within the backing wall so as not to bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the rainscreen cladding.

FINISHES 810 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

• Treatment: All surfaces to one of the following: - Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461. - An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 and BS EN ISO 14713.

820 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS • Treatment: All surfaces to one of the following: - Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

H92


- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated. - Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation of FE//Zn//C for an iridescent (yellow passivate) chromate conversion coating or FE//Zn//D for an opaque (olive green) chromate conversion coating.

830 POWDER COATING • Requirement: As section Z31.

840 ANODIZING

• Requirement: As section Z33.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION 910 GENERALLY

• Electrolytic corrosion: Take necessary measures to prevent. • Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly, handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.

912 METALWORK • Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

915 TIMBER TREATMENT • Requirement: As section Z12, unless specified otherwise in this section. • Exposed cut and drilled surfaces: Treat with two flood coats of a solution recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.

922 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION • Requirement: As section Z20, unless specified otherwise in this section.

925 SEALANT APPLICATION


930 ASSEMBLY • Location: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop. • Joints: Other than movement joints and designed open joints, must be rigidly secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed with hairline abutments. • Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for reassembly on site.

960 PRELIMINARY RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION • Requirement: Complete an area of cladding as set out below for inspection and approval of appearance. Storey height bay of North Elevation.

970 RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION • Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque figures. Do not overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement. • Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and from surfaces which will be inaccessible on completion.

980 INTERFACES • Installation: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly and neatly overlap cladding to form a weathertight junction.

985 DAMAGE • Repairs: Do not repair cladding without approval.

H92


- Approval: Will not be given where the proposed repair will impair performance or appearance. • Record of repairs: Prepare schedule or record on drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manual.

995 MAINTENANCE • Maintenance manual: Incorporate details within the Building Manual in accordance with CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', clause 7.6.1. - Materials certification and test reports to be included: as per CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', clause 7.6.1. .

J40



J40




TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

120 LOOSE LAID POLYETHYLENE DAMP PROOFING • Substrate: Sand blinded hardcore. • Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products or equivalent, One London Wall, London. EC2Y 5AB t: 01685 840672 f: 01685 842580 e: [email protected]. - Product reference: Visqueen High Performance DPM or equivalent.

• Thickness/ Gauge: 500µm membrane • Joints:

- Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint. - Laps (minimum): Adjacent sheets must be overlapped by a minimum of 150mm. Visqueen Double Sided Jointing Tape should be used to join adjacent DPM sheets. . - Sealing: The sheets should be sealed by using 100mm wide Visqueen Girth Jointing Tape. Where the sheets have been perforated they should be patched with sheets of

identical thickness lapped at least 150mm beyond the limits of the puncture and sealed with Visqueen Double Sided Jointing Tape.

130 Visqueen TreadGUARD1500 • Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products. - Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk. - Tel: +44 (0)845 302 4758. - Product reference: Visqueen TreadGUARD1500. • Bonding to substrate:Required. Visqueen Jointing Tape • Board joint tape:Visqueen Pro Single Sided Jointing Tape.

190 SELF- ADHESIVE BITUMEN DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING • Substrate: Concrete as structural engineers specification • Primer: Required. • Manufacturer: see lift pit drawings. - Product reference: Bituthene. • Number of layers: One. • Thickness/ Gauge: 1.5 mm. • Bonding: Full. Smooth out to exclude air. • Joints: - Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint. - Laps (minimum): Side and end 50 mm and 100 mm respectively. - Sealing: Roll to fully adhere. • Accessories: Not required.

WORKMANSHIP

310 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY • Condition of substrate: - Clean and even textured, free from voids and sharp protrusions. - Moisture content: Compatible with damp proofing/ tanking. • Air and surface temperature: Do not apply sheets if below minimum recommended by

membrane manufacturer. • Condition of membrane at completion: - Neat, smooth and fully supported, dressed well into abutments and around intrusions.

J40


- Completely impervious and continuous. - Undamaged. Prevent puncturing during following work. • Permanent overlying construction: Cover membrane as soon as possible.

320 INSPECTION • Give notice: Before covering any part of membrane with overlying construction.

345 COLD APPLIED BONDING COMPOUNDS • Type and application: As recommended for the purpose by the membrane

manufacturer.

350 ANGLES IN BONDED DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING • Preformed rot proof fillet to internal angles: - Size (minimum): 50 x 50 mm, splay faced. - Bedding: Bitumen mastic or bonding compound. • Reinforcing strip to all angles: - Material: As damp proofing tanking. - Width (minimum): 300 mm. - Timing: Apply before main sheeting. • Dressing of main sheeting onto adjacent surfaces (minimum): 100 mm.

360 JUNCTIONS WITH PROJECTING DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS • Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry. • Dpcs/ Cavity trays: Lap and fully bond/ seal with sheeting. - Laps (minimum): 100 mm. - Bonding/ Sealing: Double-side tape.

365 JUNCTIONS WITH FLUSH DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS • Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry. • Dpcs/ Cavity trays: - Expose edge where concealed. - Lap and fully bond/ seal sheeting to wall. - Dressing of sheeting beyond dpc/ cavity tray (minimum): 50 mm. - Bonding/ Sealing: Double-side tape.

370 PREFORMED COLLARS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC. • Manufacturer: Submit proposals. - Product reference: Submit proposals. - Sealing: Fully bond to penetrations and sheeting using double-sided jointing

tape. • Completed junctions: Impervious.

380 PROTECTION BOARDS FOR DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Thickness: 25 mm. • Application: Membrane surface clean and free from contaminants. - Bonding: Not required. - Board joints: Butted. - Board contact with membrane: Secure and continuous. • Backfilling: Carry out when tanking, loading and protection are complete.

J42



J42



To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.

TYPES OF ROOF COVERING

110A WARM ROOF COVERING TYPE RT01: Zone 2 Pitched Roof over Classrooms

• Substrate: New Metal Deck (designed and constructed level, with no deflections or back-falls, taking account in the design of the supporting structure for any anticipated inherent deflection in the metal decking that will occur). Roof falls to be provided by the tapered insulation scheme.

- Preparation: As clause 610B.

• Roof covering system: BAUDER SINGLE PLY THERMOFOL SYSTEM • System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.

Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected] Web: www.bauder.co.uk

• Primer type and application: N/A

• Vapour control layer: Bauder VB20 polyethylene vapour control layer, loose laid and installed as clause 670A.

• Insulation: BauderRock, glass fleece faced, dual density rock fibre flat board insulation 255mm thick to achieve the required U value (refer Clause 230). This product is fire resistant, has a zero ODP and a Green guide rating of ‘C’. Installation as clause 680A.

• Insulation to upstands: N/A

• Separating layer (loose laid): N/A

• Waterproof membrane: Thermofol U15 FB, 1.5 mm thick polyester reinforced fleece backed waterproofing membrane, colour Blue Grey, fully bonded by Bauder Spray Contact Adhesive. Installation as clauses 720G.

• Lap joints: All joints to be hot air welded, as clause 730A. • Details: -

Two dimensional detailing: formed using Thermofol pre-coated, pre-fabricated metal, or non-fleece backed membrane (colour and thickness as used for the flat areas), or used in combination where appropriate. Membrane to be either fully bonded using Bauder Full Bond Contact Adhesive or mechanically fixed according to the construction - refer to the Bauder Single Ply Installation Manual for further guidance. Three dimensional detailing: Complex three dimensional detailing to curves, pipes or awkward shapes to be formed using Thermofol un-reinforced D15 membrane. Otherwise Thermofol pre-formed corners must be used at intersections and returns. Detailing generally: to be carried out in accordance with clauses 760, 764A, 765A, 766A, 767A, 768A, 769, 770, 780A and the Bauder Single Ply Installation Manual.

• Surface protection: N/A

• Surfacing: N/A

• Accessories: - Use of Bauder Mastic Sealant. Application as clause 901A. - Bauder Thermofol lightning conductor clips. Installation, as clause 902A. - Bauder Thermofol standing seam profiles. Installation as clause 903A.

• Additional requirements: 210, 310, 510A, 517, 520, 522, 523, 524, 910, 940, 950C. 110B WARM ROOF COVERING – Type RT02: Zone 1 over General Office & Lobby and Zone 2 over

Break Out/Group Area • Substrate: New Metal Deck (designed and constructed level, with no deflections or back-falls,

taking account in the design of the supporting structure for any anticipated inherent deflection in the metal decking that will occur). Roof falls to be provided by the tapered insulation scheme.

- Preparation: As clause 610B.

• Roof covering system: BAUDER SINGLE PLY THERMOFOL SYSTEM

• System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.

J42



• Primer type and application: Bauder Quick Dry Primer, applied to the roof substrate and all upstands and skirtings. For application method and guidance information, refer clause as clause 660A.


• Insulation: BauderRock, glass fleece faced, dual density rock fibre tapered insulation, average thickness 260mm thick to achieve the required U value (refer Clause 230). This product is fire resistant, has a zero ODP and a Green guide rating of ‘C’ Installation as clause 680H.

• Insulation to upstands: Vertical upstands to roof light kerbs, access hatches i.e. builders kerbs (but excluding proprietary insulated integrated rooflight units) and changes of level, the Insulation is to meet the same thermal value as used for the flat area. Installation as clause 681A.

• Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 50 mm thick, BauderRock insulation. In compliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, the insulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm in height from the deck surface to the top of the upstand, with the vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681A.

• Separating layer (loose laid): N/A • Waterproof membrane: Thermofol U15, 1.5 mm thick polyester reinforced waterproofing

membrane, colour Blue Grey, attached by mechanical fixing. Installation as clauses 710A. • Lap joints: All joints to be hot air welded, as clause 730A. • Details: -


• Surface protection: N/A • Surfacing: N/A

• Accessories: - Use of Bauder Mastic Sealant. Application as clause 901A. - Bauder Thermofol lightning conductor clips. Installation, as clause 902A. - Internal Rainwater outlet (size as required to match drainage pipe work). Installation as

clause 904A. - Parapet outlet (size as required to match drainage pipe work). Installation as clause

905A.

• Additional requirements: 210, 310, 510A, 517, 520, 522, 523, 524, 910, 940, 950C. 110C WARM ROOF COVERING – Type RT03: Zone 4 over Kitchen Corridor & Zone 6 over Group

Room. • Substrate: New Plywood deck (designed and constructed to provide a minimum finished slope of

30˚). - Preparation: As clause 610A.

• Roof covering system: BAUDER SINGLE PLY THERMOFOL SYSTEM • System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.



J42



• Insulation: BauderRock, glass fleece faced, dual density rock fibre flat board insulation 255mm thick to achieve the required U value (refer Clause 230). This product is fire resistant, has a zero ODP and a Green guide rating of ‘C’. Installation as clause 680A.

• Insulation to upstands: Vertical upstands to roof light kerbs, access hatches i.e. builders kerbs (but excluding proprietary insulated integrated rooflight units) and changes of level, the Insulation is to meet the same thermal value as used for the flat area. Installation as clause 681A.

• Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 50 mm thick, BauderRock insulation. In compliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, the insulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm in height from the deck surface to the top of the upstand, with the vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681A.

• Separating layer (loose laid): N/A

• Waterproof membrane: Thermofol U15, 1.5mm thick polyester reinforced waterproofing membrane, colour Blue Grey, attached by mechanical fixing. Installation as clauses 710A.

• Lap joints: All joints to be hot air welded, as clause 730A. • Details: -


• Surface protection: N/A • Surfacing: N/A

• Accessories: - Use of Bauder Mastic Sealant. Application as clause 901A. - Bauder Thermofol lightning conductor clips. Installation, as clause 902A. - Gutter and external rainwater downpipe (size as required to match drainage pipe work).

Installation as Bauder Standard detail.

• Additional requirements: 210, 310, 510A, 517, 520, 522, 523, 524, 910, 940, 950C. 110D Cold ROOF COVERING – Type RT04: Zone 5 over unheated Link Corridor

• Substrate: New Plywood deck (designed and constructed to provide a minimum finished slope of of 1:60).

- Preparation: As clause 610A.

• On New Metal Deck (designed and constructed to provide a finished fall of 1:60, making provision for any anticipated inherent deflection in the metal decking that may occur).

• Roof covering system: BAUDER SINGLE PLY FLEECE BACKED

• System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH. Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected] Web: www.bauder.co.uk



• Insulation: NOT APPLICABLE.

• Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 50 mm thick, BauderRock insulation. In compliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, the insulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm in height from the deck surface to the top of the upstand, with the

J42


vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681A.

• Separating layer (loose laid): N/A • Waterproof membrane: Thermofol U15, 1.5mm thick polyester reinforced waterproofing

membrane, colour Blue Grey, attached by mechanical fixing. Installation as clauses 710A. • Lap joints: All joints to be hot air welded, as clause 730A.

• Details: - Two dimensional detailing: formed using Thermofol pre-coated, pre-fabricated metal, or non-fleece backed membrane (colour and thickness as used for the flat areas), or used in combination where appropriate. Membrane to be either fully bonded using Bauder Full Bond Contact Adhesive or mechanically fixed according to the construction - refer to the Bauder Single Ply Installation Manual for further guidance. Three dimensional detailing: Complex three dimensional detailing to curves, pipes or awkward shapes to be formed using Thermofol un-reinforced D15 membrane. Otherwise Thermofol pre-formed corners must be used at intersections and returns. Detailing generally: to be carried out in accordance with clauses 760, 764A, 765A, 766A, 767A, 768A, 769, 770, 780A and the Bauder Single Ply Installation Manual.

• Surface protection: N/A

• Surfacing: N/A • Accessories:

- Use of Bauder Mastic Sealant. Application as clause 901A. - Bauder Thermofol lightning conductor clips. Installation, as clause 902A. - Gutter and external rainwater downpipe (size as required to match drainage pipe work).

Installation as Bauder Standard detail. - Additional requirements: 210, 310, 510A, 517, 520, 522, 523, 524, 910, 940, 950C.

PERFORMANCE 210 ROOF PERFORMANCE

•••• Roof covering: Secure, free draining and weather-tight. 230 INSULATION

• Thermal transmittance (U-Value) of roof: 0.15 W/m²K • Finished Surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive roof covering.

• Insulation compliance: To relevant British Standard or Agrément certified. PRODUCTS 310 ANCILLARY PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

• Types: Recommended by coating manufacturer 330 TIMBER TRIMS, ETC

•••• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (except ambrosia beetle damage).

•••• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%.

•••• Preservative treatment: Please note organic solvent based timber preservatives are not permitted, as these attack bitumen based materials. 355B MECHANICAL FASTENERS

• Type: Respective thermally broken tube fasteners for the installation of Bauder single ply membrane and insulation.

J42


• Supplier: Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from SFS Intec Ltd when the project is covered by a Bauder Ltd Product and Workmanship guarantee. Projects not installed with fasteners from the above supplier will be subject to a product only guarantee from Bauder Ltd.

• Product reference: Tube fastener - Tube size and fastener type for both membrane and insulation as recommended by supplier specifically for project and installed in accordance to their fixing plan. Please note that insulation and membrane tubes differ in design. Fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given by the appropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply with the length of guarantee offered for the whole system.

• Pull out testing – incorporating mechanical fasteners: Please note that a site pull out test (carried out by an engineer from the chosen fastener supplier) is required on all refurbishment and new build concrete deck projects. Pull out testing will assist in determining the condition and suitability for mechanical restraint and thereby confirm the appropriate fastener specification. This is compulsory for all applications as part of our guarantee criteria. This should be done prior to submitting final quotations to establish cost, fastener type, fixing suitability and the length of fastener required.

• Wind Load Calculations Wind load calculations are required in accordance with BSEN 1991-1-4/NA:2011 for all projects undertaken. The wind load calculation will determine the required fastener placement / fixing pattern to ensure that the installed system will resist the appropriate site specific wind loads. The wind load calculation should be undertaken by the fastener supplier (SFS Intec Ltd in the case of where a Product and Workmanship guarantee is required).

EXECUTION GENERALLY 510A ADVERSE WEATHER

•••• General: Do not lay membrane at temperatures below 5°C or in wet or damp conditions.

•••• Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep finished areas of the roof dry.

•••• Poor weather: Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather, unless an effective temporary roof is provided over the working area.

•••• If unavoidable wetting of the construction does occur, take prompt action to minimise and make good any damage.

•••• Unfinished areas of roof: Temporarily ballast incomplete areas of membrane as necessary to protect from wind action. 517 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS

• Installation of the Bauder waterproofing system may only be carried out by approved Bauder contractors.

• Workmanship should comply with current Codes of Practice, BS6229 and Bauder Ltd installation instructions. All waterproofing materials and system components should be supplied by Bauder Ltd, unless otherwise stated, to be included within the guarantee. Non-compliant workmanship will not be permitted (even if the system is watertight). All such faults must be remedied, before the Guarantee can be issued.

• Any building work which is the responsibility of the roofing contractor and has a bearing on the life of the Bauder System should be carried out by properly trained and qualified tradesmen.

• Any structural damage, peculiarities or defects discovered that might affect the performance of the Bauder waterproofing, should be reported immediately to the client and Bauder in order that they may make a decision in overcoming the problem prior to waterproofing.

• The contractor is to ensure water tightness of the roof at all times.

• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of the waterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new membranes. The final inspection will not be carried out by the independent surveyor until all associated trades are complete and the roof areas are clear from all debris and protection layers.

J42


• All mechanical and electrical work to plant and equipment should be carried out by competent mechanical and electrical qualified tradesmen. All plant is to be reinstated and re-commissioned on completion of the roofing works in accordance with the client's detailed specification.

• Any lead work must be carried out by skilled tradesmen and in accordance with current codes of practice and the recommendations of the Lead Development Association.

520 INCOMPLETE WORK

• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to the deck to prevent water infiltration, ensuring that the insulation, if present, is protected.

• Ensure that the sequence of laying enables temporary sealing of loose membrane edges to be down on the slope and not against the flow of water.

• On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from roof. 522 PROTECTION AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

•••• Store rolls of polymeric membrane and associated products in a clean, dry, well ventilated and cool conditions.

•••• Store materials designated by the manufacturers as temperature sensitive in facilities where temperature can be maintained at the recommended level.

•••• Insulation products must be kept dry and protected from wet weather during storage and installation.

523 PROTECTION OF WORK

•••• Ensure that from completion of the roof until practical completion:

•••• The roof is not used as a working platform, unless fully protected to the satisfaction of the CA.

•••• No paints, solvents or other volatile substances harmful to the membrane are allowed to come into contact with the roof surface.

•••• No building materials stored on the roof.

•••• Finished roof areas are adequately protected from damage by subsequent building operations. 524 HEALTH & SAFETY INFORMATION – ROOFING WORK

1. Suitable precautions must be taken to prevent accidents occurring when roofing systems are being installed.

2. The contractor must ensure that adequate measures are taken to effectively prevent injury to members of the public, contractors and any other persons who may be affected by the works including the public.

3. Where microwave equipment is installed at roof level, care must be taken to prevent persons working on the roof from being exposed to large doses of microwave radiation.

4. Similarly, the contractor should liaise with the client to ensure that there are no extract outlets situated on the roof where noxious or harmful emissions could affect persons working. Suitable precautions will be necessary to prevent exposure where this situation arises.

5. The contractor is responsible for providing adequate firefighting equipment in the form of extinguishers during work on the roof. These should be kept in easily accessible locations and be suitably signed.

6. Whenever possible, access to the roof should be made via internal staircases rather than by temporary means. Where this is not available, it is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure a safe means of access, egress and a safe workplace.

J42


As far as roofs are concerned, edge protection in the form of scaffolding or a fixed structure should be in place to a height of 1.1 metres in accordance with the Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1992.

Failing this, the hierarchy of controls should be applied from the Work at Height Regulations 2005. Means of access should be by fixed ladder, passenger hoist or scaffolding.

7. The contractor must ensure that suitable written method statements and risk assessments are available for the work being undertaken. ln particular, it is essential that manual handling methods be fully assessed as roofing materials are heavy and can cause serious injury.

8. The contractor must ensure that suitable information about the roof covering is provided to the Client at the end of the work to ensure that work in future can be carried out safely. This information will form part of the Safety File.

9. All persons working on the roof should be provided with, and wear, suitable personal protective equipment and wet weather gear. Training must be provided to all contract staff on the safe use of the equipment.

10. The installer must observe Product Safety Datasheets, relevant to the materials being used as well as completing and complying with COSHH risk assessments.

11. We draw your attention to your duties under the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015. Regulation 4, Client’s duties in relation to managing projects states that the client must make suitable arrangements for managing a project, including the allocation of sufficient time and other resources. Regulation 5, Appointment of the Principal Designer and the Principal Contractor states that where more than one contractor will be working on a project at any time, the client must appoint a Principal Designer and a Principal Contractor.

Please note that although Bauder will assist with the roof waterproofing system design, we will not undertake the role of Principal Designer.

SUBSTRATES/ VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS/ WARM ROOF INSULATION 610A SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES (PLYWOOD)

• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, voids and protrusions. The new WPB plywood, thickness as specified by client, should be BBA certified, conforming to BS EN 1995 & CPD/CE compliant, fixed directly to either the joists or firings using recommended fasteners.

• Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimum finished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and the SPRA design guide. No deflections or back-falls present if the deck is designed to achieve a 0° level finished surface.

• Preliminary work: Complete including: - Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints. - Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.

• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.

• Preparation: All such items to be rectified as necessary to eliminate the possibility of puncturing the new waterproofing system.

610B SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES (METAL)

• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from corrosion, contaminants, damage and protrusions.

J42


• Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimum finished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and the SPRA design guide (after deflection). No deflections or back-falls present if the deck is designed to achieve a 0° level finished surface.

• Preliminary work: Complete including: - Formation of independent upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and

expansion joints. - Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.

• Stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity. • Preparation: The new metal deck should be of a suitable type/profile to support the vapour

barrier and insulation. Approval of the specified deck should be first obtained from Bauder Limited at specification stage to confirm suitability. The approved waterproofing contractor to Inspect the installed deck and report any issues that may have a detrimental effect upon waterproofing system to the both the Clients representative and Bauder Limited. If there is any doubt as to the exact requirement Bauder Limited should be contacted for further advice.

640 FIXING TIMBER TRIMS

•••• Fasteners: fastener type/length appropriate and suitable to particular deck substrate.

•••• Fixing centres (maximum): 500 mm. 660 APPLYING PRIMER

• Purpose: Quick drying substrate primer to seal and prepare dry surfaces of a variety of common substrate material prior to the application of Bauder bituminous waterproof membranes.

• Before application: All surfaces must be dry, clean and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease and loose material. Smooth metal to be prepared using a wire brush.

• Application method: Apply a thin even coat using a brush or roller to provide full coverage. Avoid pooling.

• Application rate: between 4-8 litres per m², dependent upon substrate porosity • Application temperature: 5-25°C

• Drying time: 3-6 hours dependent upon ambient temperature and substrate porosity.

• Coats: Fully bond. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats. Never attempt torching within 30 min of primer application, even if the surface appears dry.

• Re-application: Necessary after 24 hours exposure if waterproofing has not yet been applied, to maintain adhesion performance.

• Caution: Use only outdoors in well ventilated areas or with respiratory apparatus and keep away from all sources of ignition. Take necessary precautions to avoid the solvent vapour from entering the buildings ventilation system.

670A LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

• Loose laid directly on to the decking. The surface should be clean, dry and without any sharp penetrations, ridges or holes.

• On inspecting the deck, if the contractor is dissatisfied with any of the proprietary work and considers that this could have a detrimental effect on the vapour barrier, both the client and Bauder Limited should be informed immediately.

• All vapour barrier side laps should be overlapped 80mm and sealed using Bauder Tape 03. End laps should be overlapped 100mm and sealed using Bauder Tape 03.

• The vapour barrier should be sealed at all edges, abutments and roof penetrations. The vapour barrier should be continued to the maximum height of the insulation and secured to the structure using Bauder Tape 20 to ensure correct sealing.

680A LAYING WARM ROOF INSULATION

• Setting out: - Long edges: Fully supported. Where metal decking is specified, the long edges must be fully

support and run at right angles to metal deck troughs. - End edges: Fully supported.

J42


- Joints: close butted together. - End joints: Stagger.

• Board Facings: PIR boards -Tissue or aluminium faced boards are the same for both surfaces and can be laid either way up. Rock fibre boards should be laid with the special SPA facing laid uppermost.

• Attachment: Mechanically fixed using suitable insulation tube fasteners, as clause 355B. Care should be taken to adhere to the handling, storage and installation guidelines given in the product technical information. Boards should be mechanically fastened to the deck using the recommended pattern shown in the manufacturer’s literature with a suitably sized tube and suitable fastener. Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from SFS Intec Ltd when the project is covered by a Bauder Ltd Product and Workmanship guarantee. Projects not installed with fasteners from the above supplier will be subject to a Product guarantee from Bauder Ltd. Fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given by the appropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply with the length of guarantee offered for the whole system. All fasteners should be installed in accordance with the recommendations given by the manufacturer, as clause 355B.

• When calculating the required insulation thickness to BS EN ISO 6946: 2007, the type of mechanical fixing used may change the thickness of insulation required. The calculations undertaken by Bauder Ltd assume the use of a telescopic tube type fastener with a thermal conductivity of 1.00 W/m²K or less, the effect of which is insignificant in the overall calculation.

• Multiple board layers (where applicable): Where the total thickness of insulation required is greater than can be achieved by a single standard board, then additional boards of the same product can be installed to make up the total thickness required. Where a second board layer is required to make up the total insulation thickness required, this should be off-set and staggered from the previous layer.

• Protection: A hard timber edge or similar protection should be incorporated at all exposed edges. See clauses 330 & 640.

• Adequate falls: The inclusion of flat board insulation will not improve upon the existing fall present within the roof structure. The deck should be inspected by the installer to ascertain that the falls provided are adequate to prevent standing water. In the event of any queries Bauder Ltd should be contacted.

• Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable. 680H LAYING WARM ROOF INSULATION

• Setting out: Laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturers scheme plan and installation instructions. Bauder cannot be held responsible for the drainage performance of tapered insulation schemes applied to an inappropriate deck surface and it is the responsibility of the installing contractor to check the roof deck surface and report any discrepancies.

- Long edges: Fully supported. (Where metal decking is specified, the long edges must be fully support and run at right angles to metal deck troughs).

- End edges: Fully supported. - Joints: close butted together. - End joints: Stagger.

• Thermal performance: Refer to Manufacturer’s Tapered Insulation Layout Plan for details of ‘U’ value achieved by this scheme.

• Before installing: No tapered boards should be laid on site without a copy of the latest scheme to hand. Contractors should always refer to the Manufacturer’s scheme with regard to the recommended start point and layout of boards. If contractors are unsure of the correct plan being on site they should check with the Manufacturer’s Technical Department ASAP.

• Wastage: All off-cuts over 300mm must be considered as usable and are included as such within the scheme plan.

• Bedding: Bonded to the upper surface of the Vapour barrier using suitable Bauder Polyurethane Insulation Adhesive. The adhesive should be applied in strips following the direction of the board length. Giving continuous and equally spaced adhesive beads within each board width.

J42


- 600mm width insulation boards - 2 no: (increase to 3 no. at roof perimeter) - 800mm width insulation boards - 3 no: (increase to 4 no. at roof perimeter) - 1200mm width insulation boards - 4 no: (increase to 6 no. at roof perimeter)

• Multi-layer tapered systems only: First Layer: Bauder flatboard insulation, thickness as specified, bonded to the upper surface of the Vapour barrier using suitable Bauder Polyurethane Insulation Adhesive. The adhesive should be applied in strips following the direction of the board length giving 2 no. (increase to 3 no. at roof perimeter) 8 mm wide continuous and equally spaced adhesive beads within each 600 mm board width.

• Second Layer: The Bauder PIR Tapered board layer should be bonded using suitable Bauder Insulation Adhesive applied in strips following the direction of the board length giving 3 no. (increase to 4 no. at roof perimeter) 8 mm wide continuous and equally spaced adhesive beads within each 800 mm board width. The second layer of boards should be laid off-set and staggered. Protection to exposed edges of insulation: A hard timber edge or similar protection should be incorporated at all exposed edges. See clauses 330 & 640.

• Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable. 681A INSTALLING WARM ROOF INSULATION (INSULATED UPSTANDS)

• Boards should be mechanically fixed to the upstand using suitably sized tube fasteners and screws through the vertical surface of the vapour barrier into the underlying substrate/structure. Joints to be close butted.

• Care should be taken to adhere to the handling, storage and installation guidelines given in the product technical information. Boards should be mechanically fastened to the deck using the recommended pattern shown in the manufacturer’s literature with a suitably sized fastener.

• Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from SFS Intec Ltd when the project is covered by a Bauder Ltd Product and Workmanship guarantee. Projects not installed with fasteners from the above supplier will be subject to a product only guarantee from Bauder Ltd. Fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given by the appropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply with the length of guarantee offered for the whole system. All fasteners should be installed in accordance with the recommendations given by the manufacturer, as clause 355B.

• Protective hard edge treated timber battens must be used at all right angled edges i.e. tops of parapet walls or abutment upstands, in conjunction with the Bauder coated metal.

WATERPROOF COVERINGS/ ACCESSORIES

710A MECHANICAL FIXING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

• Setting out: To be loose laid over the insulation and mechanically fixed into position. Do not wrinkle or stretch.

• Laying: The Membrane should be mechanically fastened with a suitably sized tube fastener and screws. Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from SFS Intec Ltd when the project is covered by a Bauder Ltd Product and Workmanship guarantee. Projects not installed with fasteners from the above supplier will be subject to a product only guarantee from Bauder Ltd. Fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given by the appropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply with the length of guarantee offered for the whole system. All fasteners should be installed in accordance with the recommendations given by the manufacturer.

• Installing fasteners: - Use fixing manufacturer's recommended methods and equipment. Fixings are to be installed in

accordance with the detailed plans supplied by the fastener supplier along both head and side laps - refer clause 355B.

- Insertion: Correct and consistent. - Washers/ Pressure plates/ Bars: Refer to the Bauder Installation Guide. - Distance from fixed edge (minimum): 10 mm.

J42


- Fixing: Flush with membrane.

• When calculating the required insulation thickness to BS EN ISO 6946: 2007, the type of mechanical fixing used may change the thickness of insulation required. The calculations undertaken by Bauder Ltd assume the use of a telescopic tube type fastener with a thermal conductivity of 1.00 W/m²K or less, the effect of which is insignificant in the overall calculation.

• Equipment: A list of suitable Hot Air Welding machines and accessories specifically designed for this operation is contained in the Bauder Installation Guide. Installation of the Bauder Thermofol System shall only be carried out by Bauder trained installers and shall be carried out in accordance with the details given in the Bauder Installation Guide.

• Sheet overlaps: Extend beyond washers/ pressure plates by minimum distance of 50 mm. • Lap joint preparation: Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to

hot air welding of all laps within the Bauder Thermofol System. • Surface condition at completion: Fully sealed, smooth, weather-proof and free draining.

720G ADHESIVE BONDING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

• Attachment: To be bonded directly to the surface of the deck. The adhesive for this application must be Bauder Spray Contact Adhesive. The adhesive is to be applied to the surface of the deck in a full and continuous covering and to the fleece underside of the membrane in a full and continuous covering. The adhesive coverage rate is approximately 3-4 m²/kg, for a two coat application. It is essential that the surface of the deck is clean, dry and free from dust etc., before applying the adhesive. Care should be taken to ensure that the adhesive does not come into contact with the areas of the membrane that will require welding. The coated membrane should be applied directly onto the adhesive coated substrate after approximately 5-10 minutes of it being applied and then pressure rolled over its full surface area. All side and end laps to be hot air welded. Detailed instructions for the installation of the membrane can be found in the Bauder Installation Guide. Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the details given in the Bauder Installation Guide.

• Note: A range of approved hot air welding machines and accessories specifically designed for this operation are listed in the Bauder Installation Guide.

• Installation: Installation shall only be carried out by Bauder trained installers in strict accordance with the details given in the Bauder Installation Guide.

730A WELDED JOINTING

• Laying: Loose lay, do not wrinkle or stretch. - Side and end joints: manufacturer’s/ supplier’s recommendation

- Laps (minimum): manufacturer’s/ supplier’s recommendation - Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces for full width of joint. - Sealing: Weld together (Hot Air welded).

• Condition at completion: Fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free draining.

• Accessories: None 760 PERIMETER OF MEMBRANE

• General: Secure membrane at roof edge conditions, changes of plane, curb flashings, upstands to roof lights, etc. with mechanical fasteners.

764A PRE-FORMED PRE-COATED METAL FLASHINGS

• Thermofol Pre-Coated Metal sheet is available from Bauder for the formation of fabricated metal flashings, trims and terminations. A list of fabrication companies who already hold this material for bespoke flashing fabrication is available from Bauder Ltd. All detail designs if not in accordance with the design shown within our detail drawing attached must be submitted to Bauder for approval prior to fabrication.

• All Thermofol Coated Metal flashings must be mechanically attached using recommended fastenings installed at 250mm centres. The flashing must be sealed using Thermofol Tape 20 to the structure as shown in the attached detail drawing to ensure minimum air passage through or

J42


below the flashing. The chosen fastener supplier can give guidance as to the type of fastener required (fasteners must have counter sunk head style).

765A PERIMETER DETAILS FOR THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANES upstands, edge trims, drips,

kerbs, etc:

• Secure Bauder Thermofol preformed pre-coated metal sections to roof structure with mechanical fasteners.

• Roof membrane: Dress over perimeter profile. Overlap beyond fasteners as per manufacturers recommendations

• Sealing: Weld together. 766A WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (TWO DIMENSIONAL DETAILS)

• Upstands, edge details, flashings etc: Detail work requiring membrane is to be carried out with Bauder Thermofol membrane restrained beneath or welded directly to Thermofol Coated Metal as shown in the attached detail drawings. Thermofol Pre-Formed Corners must be used for the formation of internal or external corner details.

• Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to hot air welding of the all laps within the Bauder Thermofol System.

• A list of suitable Hot Air Welding machines and accessories specifically designed for this operation is contained in the Bauder application manual/data sheets.

767A WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (THREE DIMENSIONAL DETAILS)

• Pipes, Roof Penetrations etc.: Detail work requiring the membrane to be used in irregular angles is to be carried out with Bauder Thermofol D non-reinforced or Thermofol Pre-Formed Accessory detailing items. Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to the hot air welding of all detailing joints within the Bauder Thermofol System.

• Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to hot air welding of the all laps within the Bauder Thermofol System.

• A list of suitable Hot Air Welding machines and accessories specifically designed for this operation is contained in the Bauder application manual/data sheets.

768A COVER STRAPS TO THERMOFOL METAL

• Provision should be made to allow a 4mm gap between abutting sections in the Thermofol metal edge trim, for expansion/contraction. Supply and install Thermofol reinforced cover straps, 200mm in width fixed over the joints in the Thermofol metal edge trim to provide a smooth neat finish. The membrane should be welded to the surface of the Thermofol metal leaving the centre section of the cover strap un-welded. The cover strap should be cut to remove visible 90º corners.

769 DETAILS GENERALLY

• The minimum recommended height for constructing waterproofing details is 150mm from the top of the finished roof surface. Please note that for landscaped roofs, this minimum height is measured from the finished landscape surface as opposed to the waterproofing surface. Special attention should be paid to all structures such as rooflights, counter-flashings, window and door cills etc. These may have to be raised to enable a 150mm waterproofing detail to be formed. We cannot take responsibility for water ingress over waterproofing details insufficiently high. There may be a requirement to mechanically fix 19mm exterior grade plywood or OSB/3 to the upstand detailing to ensure a smooth even surface to receive the new waterproofing.

770 PERIMETER DETAILS FOR THERMOPLASTIC

• Upstands, edge trims, drips, kerbs, etc: Form flashings from waterproof membrane material. • Roof membrane: Terminate in horizontal plane immediately adjacent to change in direction and

secure with mechanical fasteners.

J42


• Flashings: Dress over perimeter profile. Overlap horizontal roof membrane beyond perimeter securement, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Sealing: Weld together. 780A ROOF PENETRATIONS THROUGH THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANES

• Roof membrane: Cut around penetrations and secure to deck.

• Flanged sleeve: - Type: Form from Thermofol D 15 un-reinforced membrane, complete with base flange. - Installation: Dress over and around penetration. - Roof membrane overlap to flange (minimum): 50 mm beyond fasteners. - Sealing: Weld flange to roof membrane. - Protection to top edge of sleeve: Flashing or weathering cravat. 781 PATCH REPAIRS If the specifier does not allow multi or small patch repairs then they should specify where necessary that full membrane width patches should be used.

ACCESSORIES 901A MASTIC SEALANT

• Provision should be made to allow for the use of Bauder Sealant in conjunction with Bauder Sealant Primer at all abutments with the Thermofol system, and any other instances where a mastic seal is required.

• It is imperative that the primer is used to prepare the surfaces effectively to enable a long lasting key with the sealant.

902A LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR

• If a lightning conductor tape is to be installed upon completion of the Thermofol system use either the Type 2 [Uncoated Conductor Tape] or Type 4 [Coated Conductor Tape] conductor clips incorporating the Thermofol pad fully welded to the Thermofol membrane at 1m centres. The welding of the clip to the membrane is only to be carried out by the Approved Contractor. The commissioning of the lightning conductor is to be carried out by a specialist company in conjunction with the roofing contractor.

903A THERMOFOL PROFILES

• Install Thermofol Profile, hot air welded to the surface of the main field sheet at centres to coincide with the laps of the Thermofol membrane, or at centres determined by the Specifier.

904A INTERNAL OUTLET

• Internal rainwater outlet/s (suitable for PVC membranes) of the correct size is to be installed through the system and deck after creation of a suitable size diameter opening. The outlet should be secured using suitable fasteners.

• All vapour barrier edges should be sealed to the deck using Tape 03. Connection to the rainwater waste pipe should be made by others, details for this connection can be found in the product data pages. The outlet is designed to be connected into the standard spigot end connector on the rainwater waste pipe. The outlet spigot is universal length to cope with differing insulation thickness’s and will require cutting down to the correct length. The Thermofol waterproofing membrane should be welded on to the outlets pre-attached PVC membrane (if present) or to the body of the outlet. Install the clip-fix leaf grille.

905A PARAPET OUTLET

• Internal parapet outlet/s (suitable for PVC membranes) to be installed through the system and kerb after creation of a suitable size diameter opening. The outlet should be secured using suitable fasteners.

J42


• The Thermofol waterproofing membrane should be welded on to the outlet body. A suitable leaf grille should be provided upon completion.

COMPLETION 910 INSPECTION

• Interim and final roof inspections: in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements for guarantee.

• Notification: It is the responsibility of the approved contractor to advise Bauder Ltd when the roof is ready for Final Inspection. The ‘Final Inspection’ of the waterproofing must be carried out and approved by Bauder Ltd prior to any landscaping products/materials being installed; otherwise a guarantee cannot be issued.

• Other requirements: Please also refer to preliminaries / general conditions. • Site Contact Details - Site Technician: Jez Lound - T: 07801 688323

• Technical Contact Details - Area Sales Manager: Andre Jarvis - T: 07525 224393

940 COMPLETION

• Roof areas: Clean. - Outlets: Clear.

• Work necessary to provide a weather-tight finish: Complete.

• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.

• Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from traffic and adjacent or high level working. 950C GUARANTEE

• A 15 year product and workmanship guarantee is to be provided upon completion following a Final Inspection by Bauder. Details regarding the full terms and conditions are available separately from Bauder Ltd upon request. This system must installed by a Bauder Approved Contractor, to be eligible for guarantee. The system comprises the waterproofing membranes, insulation, vapour control layer, and attachment of these products.

K10


K10

Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

K10


K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings


TYPES OF DRY LINING

125 METAL STUD PARTITION FORMING PARTITION/ WALL TYPE IWT-01: TO CLASSROOMS

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire LE12 6HX Website: www.british-gypsum.com, Tel: 0115 945 6123,E-Mail: [email protected].

• Product reference: GypWall ROBUST.

• Nominal thickness (excluding finishes): 148mm • Performance criteria:

• Fire resistance to BS 476: Part 22: 60 minutes.

• Sound insulation: Rw 55 dB.

• Partition duty to BS 5234: Parts 1 and 2: Severe. • Maximum height based on limiting deflection of L/240 at 200Pa: 5500mm.

• Timber sole plate: 85mm (nominal) x channel width.

• Framing:

• Studs: Gypframe 92 S 10 at 600mm centres and Gypframe 92 S 10 at abutments, openings and junctions.

• Stud boxing: n/a. • Floor channel: Gypframe 94 DC 60 (heights up to 8000mm), 94 EDC 70 (heights over 8000mm).

• Head channel: As floor channel or as determined by deflection criteria.

• Fixing T: Gypframe GFT1 to support horizontal joints of single layer board linings.

• Fixing strap: Gypframe GFS1 to support horizontal joints in face layer of double layer board linings, or as an alternative to fixing T for single layer board linings.

• Head condition: Suitably fixed up to METAL DECK structural soffit. • Deflection allowance: To be determined by a Structural Engineer.

• Lining: One layer 15mm Gyproc DuraLine and one layer of 12mm WBP Plywood to both sides of framing.

• Fixing: As clause 591A. • Screws: 50mm British Gypsum Drywall Screws.

• Cavity insulation: 3 layers 25mm Isover Acoustic Partition Roll (APR 1200). • Recycled content: Up to 86%.

• Gyproc Sealant: As clause 516.

• Finishing: 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (General use) as clause 681A (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (VOC absorbing finish) as clause 681B (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Plasterboard) as clause 681C (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Increased surface resistance) as clause 681D (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (General Use, Spray/Hand applied) as clause 681E (or) 3mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Magnetic finish) as clause 681F (or) Taped seamless finish as clause 671A.

• Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer. Gyproc Profilex access panels as clause 531A – if required.

• Other requirements: Fire stopping around services as section P12. Acoustically isolate junctions as required. To be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

126 METAL STUD PARTITION FORMING PARTITION/ WALL TYPE IWT-02

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire. LE12 6HX Web site: www.british-gypsum.com, Tel: 0115 945 6123, E-Mail: [email protected].

• Product reference: GypWall ROBUST. - Nominal thickness (excluding finishes): 200mm.

K10


• Performance criteria: • Fire resistance to BS 476: Part 22: 60 minutes.

• Sound insulation: (Estimated) Rw 55 dB.

• Partition duty to BS 5234: Parts 1 and 2: Severe.

• Maximum height based on limiting deflection of L/240 at 200Pa: 6800mm. - Timber sole plate: 38mm (nominal) x channel width, if required. - Framing: Studs: Gypframe metal AcouStud (146 AS 50) at 600mm centres and Gypframe metal ‘C’ (146 S 50) at abutments, openings and junctions. Stud boxing: n/a. Floor channel: Gypframe 146 DC 60 (heights up to 8000mm), 146 EDC 80 (heights over 8000mm). Head channel: As floor channel or as determined by deflection criteria. Fixing T: Gypframe GFT1 to support horizontal joints of single layer board linings. Fixing strap: Gypframe GFS1 to support horizontal joints in face layer of double layer board linings, or as an alternative to fixing T for single layer board linings. - Head condition: Suitably fixed up to structural soffit. Deflection allowance: To be determined by a Structural Engineer.

- Lining: One layer 15mm Gyproc DuraLine, sheet width 1200mm (facing layer) plus one layer 12mm WBP Plywood (inner layer), to both sides of framing

Fixing: As clause 591A. Screws: 25mm British Gypsum Drywall Screws. - Cavity insulation: 75mm Isover Acoustic Partition Roll (APR 1200). - Recycled content: Up to 86%. - Gyproc Sealant: As clause 516. - Finishing: 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (General use) as clause 681A (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (VOC absorbing finish) as clause 681B (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Plasterboard) as clause 681C (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Increased surface resistance) as clause 681D (or) 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (General Use, Spray/Hand applied) as clause 681E (or) 3mm Thistle Skim coat plaster (Magnetic finish) as clause 681F (or) Taped seamless finish as clause 671A. - Accessories: Gyproc Profilex access panels as clause 531A – if required.

- Other requirements: When using Gypframe Acoustud’s ensure the plasterboard fixing does not penetrate the web of the stud as this may affect the acoustic performance. Acoustically isolate junctions as required. To be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

130 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD • Type: Gyproc DuraLine Board.

• Thickness: 15mm. - Core density (minimum): The assumed density is 926.67 kg/m3 (13.9 kg/m2) of 15mm DuraLine. • Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

200 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM (DOUBLE GRID) SEE CEILING LAYOUT AND FINISHES DRAWINGS – CEILING TYPE C1

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum. - Product reference: Casoline MF. • Structural soffits: In situ concrete. • Suspension system: - Hanger type: As recommended by board manufacturer. Top fixings: Screws to u/s conc soffit. - Primary grid centres: 1200 mm. Hanger centres: 1200 mm. - Secondary grid centres: 600 mm or as recommended. • Linings: 12.5 mm Gyproc wall board or Gyptone Quattro 41plasterboard. - Recycled content: 30% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021.

K10


• Insulation: Soundblocker. - Thickness: 25mm. • Access units: Required positions to be agreed. • Finishing: Seamless jointing. - Primer/ Sealer: Type recommended by board manufacturer for vapour control. - Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer. • Other requirements: Fire stopping around service penetrations as section P12.

225 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM – PERFORATED (CLASS B ABSORPTION) PLASTERBOARD WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. CEILING TYPE – C2

• Lining board: Rigitone 8/18Q or equivalent. Manufacturer of board: British Gypsum, Head Office, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire, LE12 6HX

- Finishing: Seamless jointing as clause 670. Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas. - Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by lining board manufacturer. • Suspension system: As recommended by lining manufacturer to complete the ceiling system and achieve specified performance. - Grid type: MF as manufactured by Knauf / British Gysum or similar approved.. - Hangers: Type recommended by board manufacturer.

Length: To give ceiling soffit height above finished floor level as shown on Reflected Ceiling plans.

- Top fixing: To suit structural soffit of metal deck or existing concrete soffit. • Insulation: Not required. - Recycled content: Not applicable. - Thickness: Not applicable. • Access units: Required. • Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear grilles. • Other requirements: None. • System performance: - Structural: The ceiling system must safely support all anticipated loads including services fittings. Test standard: To BS EN 13964. Uniformly distributed load (maximum): 0.6 kN/m². Additional loads/ pressures: Luminaires as drawings and schedules. Deflection of grid between points of support (maximum): 0.0025 x span. - Fire resistance: Not required. - Airborne sound insulation (complete floor and ceiling assembly): Weighted sound reduction index, Rw (minimum), to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not applicable. Other requirements: None.

245 CEILING LINING ON TIMBER see ceiling plan � Background: Joists at 600 mm centres. All board joints to be supported. Fix 50x50mm sw

noggins at board joints as necessary. � Metal resilient (acoustic) bars: Not required. � Linings: two layers of 12.5mm fireline plaster board sheets (1200x2400) but jointed. Joints

between layers to be staggered.

− Fixings: Nails at ctrs 150mm. � Finishing: apply intumescent mastic to gaps in excess of 2mm.

− Primer/ Sealer: Not required.

− Accessories: Metal beads/ stops as clause 692. � Other requirements: none.

K10


255 ENCASEMENT SYSTEM (METAL FRAMING) TO COLUMNS AND RAINWATER PIPES • Manufacturer: British Gypsum. - Product reference: Gypwall. • Structural members: As drawings. - Extent of protection: Columns: Four sides.. • Fire performance: - Protection to structural steel: To BS 476-21, 60 minutes. • Framing system: Sizes and spacing of framing and fixings as recommended by the board

manufacturer. • Linings: Two layers 12.5 mm Fireline plasterboard. • Finishing: Seamless jointing. - Primer/ Sealer: Not required. - Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer.

− Other requirements: Plan dimensions of casings to be the same for all columns or as shown on drawings.

256 ENCASEMENT ON TIMBER FRAMING TO COLUMN PROJECTIONS FROM WALL FACE

− Timber framework: 44 x 44 mm with noggings at 600 mm maximum centres or as shown on drawings.

− Linings: 12mm WBP plyWOOD and 12.5mm plasterboard. - Fixing: Screws.

− Finishing: Seamless jointing. - Primer/ Sealer: Not required. - Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer .

− Other requirements: Plan dimensions of casings to be the same for all columns or as shown on drawings.

266A FRAMELESS CASING TO STRUCTURAL COLUMNS

- Structural members: Steel Columns - Manufacturer: British Gypsum, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire LE12 6HX

Website: www.british-gypsum.com Tel: 0844 800 1991 Fax: 0844 561 8816 E-Mail: [email protected] Product reference: FireCase. Type: 3 or 4 sided casing as clause (delete as appropriate) 586A (or) 586B (or) 586C (or) 586D (or) 586E (or) 586F (or) 586G.

- Fire protection of complete encasement assembly to BS 476: Part 20(550°C): 60 minutes. - A/V (Hp/A)m-1 section factor: Up to 260. - Lining: 15mm Glasroc F FIRECASE.

Screws: 40mm Glasroc F FIRECASE Screws for fixing to Gypframe FEA1 angles; 40mm Glasroc F FIRECASE Screws for board to board fixings.

- Finishing: 2mm Thistle Skim coat plaster as clause 280.

GENERAL/ PREPARATION

325 PREPARATION OF MASONRY TO RECEIVE WALL LININGS • General: Suitable to receive lining system. Redundant fixtures and services

removed. Cutting, chasing and making good completed. • Holes, gaps, service penetrations, perimeter junctions and around openings:

Seal. • Adhesive fixings: Prepare substrate to achieve effective bonding. - Contaminants: Remove loose material, dirt, grease, oil, paper, etc.

- Absorption: Control by dampening, priming or applying bonding agents as necessary.

K10


335 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS • Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:

− Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports. − Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and

accurately on linings.

− Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to suit type and performance of lining.

COMPONENTS

401 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD • Type: Gyproc wallboard. - Core density (minimum): 650 kg/m³. • Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

404 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED FIRE PROTECTION) • Type: Fireline. - Core density (minimum): 800 kg/m³. - Core: Including fibres for improved cohesion. • Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

430 ACCESS PANELS TO DUCTS • Type: 60 minutes fire protection, to BS 476-22. - Sizes: SEE DRAWINGS. • Frame: Bead for taping and jointing. • Panel: MR MDF. • Lock: Tamper proof and operated by castellated key.

INSTALLATION

435 DRY LININGS GENERALLY • General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and

installation methods recommended by board manufacturer. • Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing

paper facing. - Cut edges: Minimize and position at internal angles wherever possible.

Mask with bound edges of adjacent boards at external corners. • Fixings boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled

backgrounds. • Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt

changes of level.

445 CEILINGS • Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before installing dry lined walls and partitions. • Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with

ends staggered in adjacent rows. • Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

455 METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS • Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb. - Frame/ Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining

sequence across openings. - Additional studs: To support vertical edges of boards. • Fixing centres at perimeters (maximum): 600 mm.

K10


• Openings: Form accurately. - Doorsets: Use sleeved or boxed metal studs and/ or suitable timber framing to

achieve strength grade requirements for framing assembly and adequately support weight of door.

- Services penetrations: Allow for associated fire stopping.

485 SUSPENDED CEILING GRIDS • Setting out: Accurately aligned and level. - Grid members and hangers: Centres to suit specified linings and imposed

loads. - Additional grid members: Provide bracing and stiffening at upstands, partition

heads, access hatches, etc. • Fixing: Securely at perimeters, grid joints, top and bottom hanger fixings.

510 SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS • Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings. - Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame

junctions. • Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no

gaps. - Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After

sealing, fill with jointing compound.

516 ACOUSTIC SEALANT

• Manufacturer and reference: British Gypsum Limited, Gyproc Sealant. - Location: At junctions with adjoining structure, and at other airpaths. - Apply as a continuous bead to clean, dry, dust free surfaces, leaving no

gaps. - After application of sealant, bulk fill gaps between floor and underside of plasterboard using Gyproc joint compound.

530 CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS WITHIN PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS • Metal framed systems: - Material: Wire reinforced mineral wool 50 mm (minimum) thick. - Installation: Form accurately and fix securely with no gaps to provide a

complete barrier to smoke and flame. • Adhesive fixed wall lining systems: - Material: Adhesive compound. - Installation: Form in a continuous line with no gaps to provide a complete barrier

to smoke and flame.

545 CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS WITHIN SUSPENDED CEILINGS • Type: 50 mm mineral wool wire reinforced mattress. • Fire resistance: To BS 476-20, 60/30 minutes (Integrity/ Insulation). • Ceiling void subdivision: Fix barriers not more than 20 m apart in any direction. • Fixing at perimeters and joints: Secure, stable and continuous with no gaps, to

provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame. • Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible

materials. Adequately support services passing through barrier. • Ceiling systems for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of

ceiling system.

K10


555 FIRE STOPPING AT PERIMETERS OF DRY LINING SYSTEMS • Material: Tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent mastic/ sealant. • Application: To perimeter abutments to provide a complete barrier to smoke and

flame.

560 JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS • Tapered edged plasterboards: - Bound edges: Lightly butted. - Cut/ unbound edges: 3 mm gap. • Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap. • Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap.

565 VERTICAL JOINTS • Joints: Centre on studs. - Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs. - Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

570 HORIZONTAL JOINTS • Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions

where height of partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board. • Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm. • Edges of boards: Support using additional framing. - Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer.

575 PLANK PLASTERBOARD • First layer in two layer boarding: Square edged with long edges at right angles

to studs.

590 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO METAL FRAMING/ FURRINGS • Partitions/ Wall linings: Fix securely and firmly at the following centres

(maximum): - Single layer boarding: To all framing at 300 mm centres. Reduce to 200 mm

centres at external angles. - Multi-layer boarding: Face layer at 300 mm centres, and previous layers around perimeters at 300 mm centres. • Ceilings: 230 mm. Reduce to 150 mm at board ends and at lining perimeters. • Position of screws from edges of boards (minimum): 10 mm. - Screw heads: Set in a depression. Do not break paper or gypsum core.

595 DEFLECTION HEADS • Fixing boards: Do not fix to head channels.

610 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER • Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum): - Nails: 150 mm. - Screws to partitions/ wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external

angles. - Screws to ceilings: 230 mm. • Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum): - Bound edges: 10 mm. - Cut/ unbound edges: 13 mm. • Position of nails/ screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.

FINISHING

K10


650 LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS • Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. • Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and

straightedges (450 mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5. - Tapered edge joints: Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet resting

on boards: 3 mm. - External angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm. - Internal angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.

670 SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS • Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs. • Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound

and cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded. • Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with

specified edge/ angle bead. • Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond

previous application to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface. • Nail/ screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface. • Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.

692 RIGID BEADS/STOPS • Internal: To BS EN 13658-1. • External: To BS EN 13658-2.

695 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS • Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles. • Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line

and level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate. • Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus

material while still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.

K11


K11 Rigid sheet flooring/ sheathing/ decking/ sarking/ linings/ casings

K11


K11 Rigid sheet flooring/ sheathing/ decking/ sarking/ linings/ casings


TYPES OF FLOORING/ SHEATHING/ DECKING/ SARKING/ LINING/ CASINGS

115 PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING � Substrate: Metal stud internal wall; Metal stud partition system C section studs � 50mm C metal studs frame for steel and services encasement system - Additional supports: As clause 930. � Sheathing: Plywood manufactured to the relevant standards and quality control procedures

specified in BS 5268-2, and so marked. - Type: Plywood. - Grade: WBP. - Nominal thickness/ number of plies: 12mm � Setting out: Long edges vertical and centred on supports. - Expansion gap between adjacent boards (unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer):

2-3 mm. � Fixing to supports: - Fasteners: 50 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ringed shank nails. - Fixing centres (maximum): Around board edges: 150 mm. Along intermediate supports: 300 mm.

Fixing distance from edges (minimum): 25 mm from bottom edge of board and 10 mm from other edges.

815 PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING � Substrate: Metal studs SFS system as G10/150 to inner leaf of external wall. � 50mm C metal studs frame for steel and services encasement system - Additional supports: As clause 930. � Sheathing: Plywood manufactured to the relevant standards and quality control procedures

specified in BS 5268-2, and so marked. - Type: Plywood. - Grade: WBP. - Nominal thickness/ number of plies: 12mm � Setting out: Long edges vertical and centred on supports. - Expansion gap between adjacent boards (unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer):

2-3 mm. � Fixing to supports: - Fasteners: 50 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ringed shank nails. - Fixing centres (maximum): Around board edges: 150 mm. Along intermediate supports: 300 mm.

Fixing distance from edges (minimum): 25 mm from bottom edge of board and 10 mm from other edges.

816 CEMENT BONDED PARTICLEBOARD ON LIGHT STEEL FRAMING • Substrate: LIGHT STEEL FRAMING./ METAL STUDS

- Additional supports: AS CLAUSE 930. • Cement bonded particleboard: To BS EN 634-2, Class 1.

- Manufacturer/ Supplier: VIROC/Chiltern Timber Supplies, Riversend Sawmills, Unit 3, Riversend Road , Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire, HP3 9AJ, United Kingdom Tel: 01442 248444 Fax: 01442 233600 or equivalent. . Product reference: VIROC or equivalent.

- Surface finish: standard.

K11


- Colour: grey. - Thickness: 12 mm. - Edges: as delivered. - Other requirements: Air Tightness line - High Grade Sealing Tape between board joints.

• Setting out: Long edges running across supports. - Gap between adjacent boards: to Manufacturer's recommendations.

• Fixing to supports: - Fasteners: to Manufacturer's recommendations, non-corrosive material. - Fixing centres (maximum):

Around board edges: to Manufacturer's recommendations. Along intermediate supports: to Manufacturer's recommendations.

- Fixing distance from edges (minimum): to Manufacturer's recommendations. • Joint treatment: Adhesive bonded as recommended by Manufacturer. • Accessories: To maintain the Air Tightness line along the inside face of the Viroc board use

suitable sealing tape to Manufacturer's recommendations.

875 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD FOR MANIFOLD CASINGS � Base/Background: 38X38 mm s/w frame. Additional supports as clause 930.

− Medium density fibreboard: To BS EN 622:Part 5, − Type waterproof

− Supplier/Proprietary reference: − Formaldehyde class to BS EN 622:Part 1: Class

− Fire rating: Class 1 − Thickness: 19 mm.

− Edges: Square sanded smooth � Install with long edges running vertical. Fix to supports with oval nails spaced at 300 mm maximum centres around board edges and

at 450 mm maximum centres along intermediate supports. Fixings to be not less than 12 mm from board edges.

� Joint treatment: sealed � Accessories: Access plate at joints fixed with recessed brass cups and screws.

WORKMANSHIP

910 INSTALLATION GENERALLY � Timing: Building to be weathertight before fixing boards internally. � Moisture content of timber supports (maximum): 18%. � Joints between boards: Accurately aligned, of constant width and parallel to perimeter

edges. � Methods of fixing, and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified otherwise.

930 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS � Additional studs, noggings/ dwangs (Scot) and battens:

− Provision: In accordance with board manufacturer's recommendations and as follows. − Tongue and groove jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported perimeter edges.

− Butt jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported edges.

− Size: Not less than 50 mm wide and of adequate thickness.

− Quality of timber: As for adjacent timber supports. − Treatment (where required): As for adjacent timber supports.

940 BOARD MOISTURE CONTENT AND CONDITIONING � Moisture content of boards at time of fixing: Appropriate to end use. � Conditioning regime: Submit proposals.

K11


950 MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING � Test regime and equipment: Submit proposals. � Test results: Submit record of tests and results.

960 FIXING GENERALLY � Boards/ sheets: Fixed securely to each support without distortion and true to line and level. � Fasteners: Evenly spaced in straight lines and, unless otherwise recommended by board

manufacturer, in pairs across joints. � - Distance from edge of board/ sheet: Sufficient to prevent damage. � Surplus adhesive: Removed as the work proceeds.

980 OPEN JOINTS

� Perimeter joints, expansion joints and joints between boards: Free from plaster, mortar droppings and other debris.

� Temporary wedges and packings: Removed on completion of board fixing.

990 ACCESS PANELS � Size and position: Agree before boards are fixed. � Additional noggings, battens, etc: Provide and fix as necessary.

K32


K32

Panel cubicles

K32


K32 Panel cubicles


112 CUBICLES TO WC’s � Product: TLS (Total Laminate Simplicity) EC3 cubicle system. � Material: 12-13mm phenolic laminate edged and curved. � Sheet Size: To suit panel sizes shown on drawings. � Core: 13mm resin phenolic laminate. � Face: Finishes T.B.C from the Sonae washroom colour selector � Edge: Panels to have all edges semi polished at 13mm � Fixing: By TLS approved methods to achieve 10 yr material warranty. TLS to

work with builder so they install correctly, inc drawings for approval and site measure.

� Fittings: To be Enhanced fittings in stainless steel inc indicator, all items to be through fixed to include D section (polished) head rail, Bullet rising legs, rising ant FT hinges, emergency release indicator bolts, brackets and hat & coat hooks

� Heights: Cubicle heights to be as Architect’s drawings. � Material: Polyrey is manufactured to current BS regulations � Supplier: Total Laminate Systems, 11 Nimrod Way, East Dorset Trade Park,

Wimborne Dorset BH21 7SH � Contact no: 01202 877600 � Contact email [email protected] � Contact: Mr Chris Nunn – Commercial Director

120 DUCT PANELS � Product: TLS (Total Laminate Simplicity) DAPS 1 with Compact panels � Material: Polyrey from the TLS washroom collection. � Core: 13mm compact grade laminate � Face: Finishes T.B.C from the colour selector provided � Edge: D mould finger safe � Fixing: By TLS approved methods to achieve correct finish. TLS to work with

builder so they install correctly, inc drawings for approval and site measure. � Fittings: To include bonded headers for ceilings and plinths for floor trades, all

required clips and timber frames. � Material: Polyrey is manufactured to current BS regulations � Supplier: Total Laminate Systems, 11 Nimrod Way, East Dorset Trade Park,

Wimborne Dorset BH21 7SH � Contact no: 01202 877600 � Contact email [email protected]

Contact: Mr Chris Nunn – Commercial Director

210 SAMPLES � General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following:

Panel and door material and colours - Allow for 4 colours to choose from. � Delivered materials/ products: To match samples. � General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following:

Panel and door material and colours. � Delivered materials/ products: To match samples.

K32


250 INSTALLATION � Programming: Do not install cubicles before building is weathertight, wet trades

have finished their work, wall and floor finishes are complete, and the building is well dried out.

� Accuracy: Set out to ensure frames and/ or panels and doors are plumb, level and accurately aligned.

� Modifications: Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished components except where shown on drawings.

� Fixing: Secure using methods and fasteners recommended by the cubicle manufacturer.

� Prevent pulling away, bowing or other distortions to frames, panels and doors. - Moisture and thermal movement: Make adequate allowance for future movement.

135 CASING SYSTEM MX Plywood Casing System

� Manufacturer: Pendock. Web: www.pendock.co.uk. Email: [email protected]. Product reference: Pendock MX Type A,B, C, D .

� Dimensions: Refer to drawings � Finish: High pressure laminate. � Colour/ species: White. � Joint type: J2 – white. � Fixing: to be confirmed. � Accessories/ Other requirements:

- Internal corner; - External corner; - Stop end - LH; - Stop end - RH; - 'Easy-fit' joint cover; - Inner collar; - Male and female joint; and - Ventilation grille.

136 CASING SYSTEM CH Plywood Casing System � Manufacturer: Pendock.

Web: www.pendock.co.uk. Email: [email protected].

− Product reference: [B, C, D & E]. � Dimensions:

− Leg: [To be confirmed]. � Dimensions: To be confirmed. � Finish: High pressure laminate. � Colour/ species: White. � Joint type: J2 – white. � Fixing: to be confirmed. � Accessories/ Other requirements:

- Internal corner; - External corner; - Stop end - LH; - Stop end - RH; - 'Easy-fit' joint cover; - Inner collar; - Male and female joint; and - Ventilation grille.

K40



K40



To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM

110 UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM. SEE CEILING LAYOUT AND FINISHES DRAWINGS TO IDENTIFY AREAS – CEILING TYPE C3

� Ceiling system manufacturer: Armstrong. - Product reference: Ultima Microlook BE, Trulok Prelude XL / TL.

� Ceiling: - Type: lay in grid. - Ceiling module: 600 x 600 mm. - Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: Refer Reflected Ceiling Plans.

� Grid: - Form: Interlocking. - Exposure: Exposed.

� Access: Infill units fully demountable, As clause 265 � Ancillary system components:

- Suspension system: Required. - Perimeter trim: Required.

� Accessories: None. � Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires and

sprinklers. � Other requirements: none.

120 UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM – CEILING TYPE C4

� Ceiling system manufacturer: Armstrong. - Product reference: Bioguard Plain.

� Ceiling: - Type: lay in grid. - Ceiling module: 600 x 600 mm. - Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: 2.7m.

� Grid: - Form: Interlocking. - Exposure: Exposed .

� Access: Infill units fully demountable. � Ancillary system components:

- Suspension system: Required. - Perimeter trim: Required.

� Accessories: None. � Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires and

sprinklers. � Other requirements: none. �

125 SUSPENDED CEILING

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire LE12 6HX Website: www.british-gypsum.com, Tel: 0115 945 6123,E-Mail: [email protected]. British Gypsum.

− Ceiling system: MF and Suspended Ceiling, refer to Sections. − Structural soffit: Concrete slab/Timber Joists, refer to structural engineer’s design

K40


− Type: Gypsum tiles in 15mm exposed grid. − Performance criteria:N/A

− Sound Absorption Class: C.

− Sound Absorption Coefficient (aw): 0.6

− Cavity/Plenum depth: 45mm (min.) − Suspension system: Grid and hanger fixings/ spacing as required for the project.

Hangers shall be suspended from suitable fixing points spaced at standard 1200mm centres depending specific project requirements.

− Grid type: CasoLine QUICK-LOCK T15/38, 15mm grid system (Main Tee 15/38 – 3000mm, Cross Tee 15/38 – 600mm, Cross Tee 15/38 – 1200mm).

− Hangers: CasoLine QUICK-LOCK Hanger (90mm to 2300mm depths) using an appropriate size for the required plenum, secured to Casoline MF12 Soffit Cleat via hook or suspension wire (min.14 swg by others) secured to soffit using fixings recommended by suspended ceiling contractor.

− Perimeter trims: CasoLine QUICK-LOCK wall angle, WA02 (19mm x 24mm). - Colour: Snow White (RAL 9016). - Membrane material(s): Gyptone SIXTO 60 tiles (See clause K40/250). Edge profile: Bevelled and rebated ref. E15. Size(s): 600mm x 600mm x 10mm. Finish/colour: Pre-finished white. - Insulation: n/a. Recycled content: n/a. - Services fittings: As per Mechanical Engineer’s design - Accessories: N/A - Other requirements: N/A

GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

205 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � Testing/ assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following:

Electrical continuity and earth bonding . � Materials, components and details: Use those used in the test and identified in the

assessment reports. If discrepancies arise, give notice.

210 ENVIRONMENT � Environmental classification to BS 8290-1: Normal .

220 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE TO ALL SUSPENDED CEILINGS

� Loads: The ceiling system must safely support all anticipated loads, including services fittings:

� Uniform distributed loads: manufacturers or suppliers to state the maximum � uniformly distributed load that their grids sustain whilst keeping within the

prescribed limits for deflection. - Points loads: none. - Additional loads/ pressures to be sustained by ceiling system: luminaires and downlighters as electrical schedule. Ceiling system subject to wind pressure: No.

� Deflection (maximum) between points of support: - Span under 1200 mm: Span/400. - Span 1200-1800 mm: Span/500. - Span over 1800 mm: Span/600.

� Test standard: To BS 8290-2, Appendix A.

K40


COMPONENTS

245 STANDARDS � Components: To BS 8290-2.

− Aluminium sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485.

− Aluminium bars, tubes and sections: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020.

250 SUSPENSION SYSTEM TRULOK PRELUDE TO ALL AREAS � Extent of system: Include all hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members,

primary channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc. necessary to complete the ceiling system and achieve specified performance.

� Top fixings: AS RECOMMENDED BY CEILING CONTRACTOR. � Hangers: TRULOK BP AW950 Suspension wire . � Grid type: Exposed.

- Finish: Pre coated fully polymerised Polyester finish. - Colour: Armstrong Global White.

260 PERIMETER TRIMS Trulok Perimeter trim BP T1932H � Type: capped perimeter angle. � Manufacturer: Armstrong.

- Product reference: na. � Fixings:

- Fasteners: as recommended my manufacturer. - Fixing centres (maximum): 450 mm.

265 INFILL UNITS for Ultima ceilings - Armstrong tegular BP 9538 M4C � Type: Mineral fibre with reinforced face. � Manufacturer: Armsrong � Product reference: � Form: Lay in tiles. � Sizes: 600x600 mm. � Finish: Acoustically transparent painted finish. � Colour: Armstrong global white.

266 INFILL UNITS for Ultima ceilings - Armstrong Bioguard Plain Board BP 222 1M4 � Type: Mineral fibre with reinforced face. � Manufacturer: Armsrong � Product reference: � Form: Lay in tiles. � Sizes: 600x600 mm. � Finish: Painted finish. � Colour: Armstrong global white.

285 INSULATION - ACOUSTIC � Manufacturer: SOUND REDUCTION SYSTEMS. � Product reference: Soundblocker 25. � Purpose: Acoustic. � Performance: 45 dB insulation. � Type: Mineral wool pads. � Recycled content: Not applicable. � Thickness: 25mm. � Density: Not applicable. � Facings/ Wrappings: Not applicable.

K40


EXECUTION

305 SETTING OUT � General: Completed ceiling should present, over the whole of its surface exposed to

the room below, a continuous and even surface, jointed (where applicable) at regular intervals.

� Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned. � Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length. � Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length. � Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes. Allow for permitted deviations from nominal

sizes of infill unit. � Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to

walls, unless specified otherwise. � Suitability of construction: Give notice where building elements and features to

which the ceiling systems relate are not square, straight or level.

310 BRACING � General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling

system resistant to design loads and pressures.

315 PROTECTION � Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed. � Ceiling materials: When necessary, remove and replace correctly using special

tools and clean gloves, etc. as appropriate.

320 TOP FIXING � Building structure: Verify suitability. � Structural soffit: Existing concrete slab.

- Suitability to receive specified fixings: Evaluate and confirm. � Fixing to:

- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors. - Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of concrete units and provide a system of primary support channels. - Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors. - Metal roof decking: Fix to sides of liner tray corrugations. - Timber: Fix to side of joists at least 50 mm from bottom edge. If ceiling system is intended for fire protection, fix into top third of joists. - Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.

� Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.

325 INSTALLING HANGERS � Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use. � Installation: Install vertical or near vertical, without bends or kinks. Do not allow

hangers to press against fittings, services, or insulation covering ducts/ pipes. � Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either brace diagonal

hangers against lateral movement, or hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging across obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.

� Extra hangers: Provide as necessary to carry additional loads. � Fixing:

- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical movement. - Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for top fixing.

� Spacings: manufacturers recommendations.

K40


335 INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS � Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.

- External and internal corners: Mitre joints generally. Overlap joints at internal corners are not acceptable. - Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align adjacent lengths.

� Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall, edge battens or other building structure. - Fasteners: Contractor’s choice. - Fixing centres: 450 mm.

340 EXPOSED GRIDS � Grid fixings: Wire hangers. � Main runners: Install level. Do not kink or bend hangers.

- Spliced joints: Stagger. - Wire hangers passing through main runners: Use sharp bends and tightly wrapped loops. - Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for bottom fixing. - Angular displacement of long axis of one runner in relation to next runner in line with it: Not visually apparent.

� Cross members supported by main runners or other cross members: Install perpendicular to intersecting runners.

� Cross tees: Flat and coplanar with flanges of main runners after panel insertion. - Cross tees over 600 mm long, cut and resting on perimeter trim: Provide an additional hanger.

� Holding down clips: Locate to manufacturer's recommendations. - Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Use clip type featured in the fire test/ assessment.

345 CONCEALED GRIDS � Grid fixings: Strap hangers. � Primary support channels: Install level. Do not kink or bend hangers.

- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Twice wrapped. Loops tightly formed. - Angle/ Strap hangers: Do not use rivets for bottom fixing.

� Splines: Locate between infill units to assist levelling of adjacent units and to resist air movement at joints.

� Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.

385 UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS � Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability. � High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.

390 OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS � General: Neat and accurate. To suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not

distort ceiling system.

395 INTEGRATED SERVICES � General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in

relation to the ceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of ceiling system.

� Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not damage or distort the ceiling. - Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Not less than ceiling material.

K40


� Services outlets: - Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers. - Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.

401 CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES � Support: NA

- Independently supported luminaires: Suspension adjusted to line and level of ceiling. - Ceiling supported luminaires: Modifications and/ or extra support required: To each luminaire as necessary.

� Surface mounted luminaires: Units installed so that in event of a fire the designed grid expansion provision is not affected.

� Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Compatible with ceiling module. Extension boxes must not foul ceiling system.

� Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless mounted above grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.

� Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Luminaires must not diminish protection integrity of ceiling system.

� Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.

406 TRUNKING � Recessed trunking: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless

mounted above grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.

411 MECHANICAL SERVICES � Fan coil units:

- Inlet/ Outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit. - Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components. - Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan coil units.

� Air grilles and diffusers: - Setting out: Accurate and level. - Linear air diffusers: Retain in place with lateral restraint. Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units. - Grille/ Diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.

� Smoke detectors and PA speakers: - Ceiling infill units: Scribe and trim to suit. - Independent suspension: Not required. - Flexible connections: Required.

� Sprinkler heads: Carefully set out and level.

415 INSTALLING INSULATION � Fitting: Fit accurately and firmly with butted joints and no gaps. � Insulation within individual infill units: Fit closely. Secure to prevent displacement

when infill units are installed or subsequently lifted. - Dustproof sleeving: Reseal, if cut.

� Width: Lay insulation in the widest practical widths to suit grid member spacings. � Services: Do not cover electrical cables that have not been sized accordingly. Cut

insulation carefully around electrical fittings, etc. Do not lay insulation over luminaires.

� Sloping and vertical areas of ceiling system: Fasten insulation, to prevent displacement.

�

K40


425 INSTALLING CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS � Maximum ceiling void dimension in any direction: As P10. � Fixing: Secure barrier at head and base using proprietary angle support system.

- General: Fix barriers securely to channels or angles at abutments to building structure. - At perimeters and joints: Provide permanent stability and continuity with no gaps to form a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

� Joints: Form to preserve integrity in fire. � Service penetrations: Cut barriers neatly to accommodate services. Fit fire resistant

sleeves around flexible materials. Fill gaps around services to fire barrier manufacturer's recommendations to maintain barrier integrity. Adequately support services passing through the barrier.

� Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of ceiling system.

� Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink barriers with ceiling system.

500 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING � Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and fully

earth bonded to carry prospective earth fault currents. - Standard: To BS 7671.

� Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of each independent area of suspension system.

� Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings, test � conductive parts of suspension system required to carry earth fault current, or used

as bonding connections. Give notice before testing. - Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling system and to earth bar in distribution board serving the area. - Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault conditions. - Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe duration, and indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 ohms and 0-20 ohms. - Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings. - Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of the path forming the earth fault loop.

COMPLETION

520 USER INSTRUCTIONS � Contents: Include the following:

- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components. - Cleaning methods and materials. - Recommendations for redecoration. - Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent alterations and maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance is not impaired.

� Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to ceiling system after installation.

530 SPARES � General: At Completion supply the following: 2 cartons of each type of ceiling tile.

L10


L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

L10


L10 WINDOWS/ ROOFLIGHTS/ SCREENS/ LOUVRES To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE � Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated

components comply with specified performance requirements.

120 SITE DIMENSIONS � Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record

on shop drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.

140 CONTROL SAMPLES

� Procedure:

− Finalize component details.

− Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity required for the project.

− Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacturer of the remaining quantity.

150 DAYLIGHT PERFORMANCE:

� Daylight calculations: In accordance with BS 8206-2, CIBSE 'Lighting guide LG10' and

� BRE 'Site layout guide'. � BREEAM requirements:

155 VIEW OUT:

� Windows/ opening sizes and position: Design to meet BREEAM 'View out' criteria for relevant building type.

� Submit design plan and elevation drawings showing the following: � All BREEAM defined 'relevant areas' dependent on building type and room depths. � Actual or notional workstation/ desk layouts. � Window/ open areas. � Submit site plan showing: Building location and proximity to external obstructions.

PRODUCTS

205 WINDOW MATERIALS SPECIFICATION:

� Minimum BRE 'Green Guide to Specification Online' rating: TBC. 330A ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

� Manufacturer: Kawneer UK Ltd, Astmoor, Runcorn, Cheshire, WA7 1QQ tel 01928 502500 or equivalent.

− Product reference: Kawneer AA601 top hung vents and fixed lights − Finish as delivered: Kawneer Permacover polyester powder coat paint from

standard, non-metallic, colour range. Minimum thickness of coating to be 60 microns.

− Frames: Aluminium profiles shall be extruded from aluminium alloy EN-Aw 6060 T66 complying with the recommendations of BS EN 755 part 2 and EN 573 part 3. Outer and vent frame members shall be 59mm front to back

L10


and mitre cut at 45 degrees. All joints shall be sealed during fabrication against water entry.

� Weather-stripping to be extruded synthetic rubber gaskets set in undercut grooves in the frame and vent. Sealed double glazing units neutral colour, incorporating SKN 154 coating or equivalent. Aluminium windows shall have a standard U value of 1.2 W/m2 K

� Glazing details: Glazing to consist of solar control double glazed units incorporating low emissivity glass with a neutral coating and argon filling. Inner pane to be laminated glass. and outer pane to be toughened. Overall sound reduction of Rw 30, g values of 0.28 in a southerly, easterly and westerly orientation and 0.64 in northern orientations. Glass to be set against extruded EPDM rubber gaskets retained in undercut grooves within the aluminium profile.

− Performance As specified below to BS 6375:Part 1, and to achieve Class A for mechanical testing to Part 2

− Water tightness 600 pascals

− Air Permeability 600 pascals

− Wind Resistance 2000 pascals − All framing including mullions, transoms and couplers shall be capable of

withstanding the design wind loadings calculated in accordance with BS 6399:part 2.

� Finish: Polyester Powder Coating RAL Colour to be advised. � Ironmongery/ Accessories:

Espagnolette locking system In-line handle with key deadlock Securistyle stainless steel friction stay. Concealed releasable locking restrictor. Actuators to all windows over 1800mm from FFL.

� Fixing: Lug fixed through frame into structure with proprietary frame anchors. All products to be manufactured and installed strictly in accordance with Kawneer product manuals.

330B uPVC WINDOWS and Doors

� Manufacturer: REHAU Ltd. Hill Court, Walford, Ross-on-Wye, Herefordshire HR9 5QN Tel: +44 (0)1989 762600

� Product reference: REHAU Tritec 60mm system. (Casement/ Pivot/ Tilt and Turn/ Fixed as per window schedule requirements)

� Colour/ Finish: TBC - External: TBC - Internal: TBC

� Glazing: - Type: 24.8mm insulating unit, glazed internally.(toughened outer/ argon filled cavity/laminated inner with low-e coating) (Reinforced) 1.2 W/m2 K (U-value) - Options: Teleflex Opening System. Refer Clause 450.

� Ironmongery: Anti-switch barrier /Controllable ventilators /Locking handles /Multi-point espagnolette locking /Night vent /Permanent ventilators /Sash lifter /Scissor hinge /Security restrictor /Slot vent /TBT bottom hinge, standard /TBT bottom hinge, concealed /TBT restrictor /TBT top hinge as required. Refer Window Schedule.

� Concealed gearing: Required

450 WINDOW CONTROLS - Teleflex � Drawing: see elevations – See window schedules including replacement windows � Manufacturer: BJP Window Controls Ltd. tel. No. 01902 409461

− Teleflex controls to be located at a level 1600mm above FFL.

L10


460 PURPOSE MADE FIXED FLATGLASS ROOFLIGHT

� Manufacturer: Roofglaze Limited. Unit 30-31, Little End Road, Eaton Socon, St Neots, Cambridgeshire, PE19 8JH. Tel: 01480 474797. Fax: 01480 474774. Email: sales @roofglaze.co.uk. Web: www.roofglaze.co.uk.

� Product Reference: FIXED FLATGLASS ROOFLIGHT � References on roof plan: RL01,02,03 & 04 � Frame: Extruded aluminium section to BS1474 � Finish: Polyester powder coated to BS6496. � Colour: RAL TO BE ADVISED. � Glazing Specification (Double Glazed)

- Outer: 6mm Pilkington Insulight Activ™ Blue (Self-cleaning) including a Ritec coating and a sand-blasted border to obscure underside frame construction.

- Cavity: 16mm Argon filled with warm edge spacer bar and perimeter silicone seal.

- Inner: 6 mm Pilkington Optitherm™ S3 inner pane and 16 mm 90% argon filled cavity)

- LIGHT TRANSMISSION = 78% - SOLAR G VALUE = 0.63 - ACOUSTIC = 37 Rw dB Laminated - CENTRE PANE U VALUE = 1.1W/m².K

� OTHER REQUIREMENT: All finishes/waterproofing to perimeter kerb upstands to be provided/carried out by others.

- Kerb: Consult with Roofglaze for details. Builder’s external weathered timber/steel kerb at a minimum 5 degree pitch and 80mm thickness (all constructed by others).

510 GLAZED WOOD SCREENS – FIRE RATED

Location: Internal glazed fire rated openings. � Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.

- Species: Softwood as table NA1. - Appearance class: J20. - Moisture content on delivery: 9-13%.

� Manufacturer Mann McGowan (01252 333601) or equal approved. � Assembly adhesive: Synthetic resin to BS EN 301, type I. � Joinery workmanship: As section Z10. � Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. � Glazing details: Toughened glass. Proprietary intumescent glazing system to

provide 30 minute fire resistance, integrity only and an acoustic performance of 40dB Rw.

� Special features/ Other requirements: Appearance to be similar to adjoining non fire rated screens.

� Fixing: Screw fixed and pelleted as clause 780.

511 GLAZED WOOD SCREENS - NON FIRE RATED � Location: Internal Glazed openings. � Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.

- Species: Softwood as table NA1. - Appearance class: J20. - Moisture content on delivery: 9-13%.

� Manufacturer Mann McGowan (01252 333601) or equal approved. � Assembly adhesive: Synthetic resin to BS EN 301, type I. � Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.

L10


� Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60. � Glazing details: Toughened glass, to provide an acoustic performance of 40dB Rw. � Special features/ Other requirements: Appearance to be similar to adjoining fire

rated glazed screens. � Fixing: Screw fixed and pelleted as clause 780.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS � General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or

placed in clean, dry floored and covered storage. � Stored components: Stack vertical or near vertical on level bearers, separated with

spacers to prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

730 PRIMING/ SEALING � Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Prime or seal as specified before

fixing components.

740 CORROSION PROTECTION � Surfaces to be protected: Aluminium alloy components in contact with preservative

treated timber. � Protective coating: Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949 or an approved

mastic impregnated tape. � Timing of application: Before fixing components.

750 BUILDING IN

− General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

− Brace and protect components to prevent distortion and damage during construction of adjacent structure.

765 WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY

− Installation: Into prepared openings.

− Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction: − Minimum: 9mm

− Maximum: 15mm

− Distortion: Install windows squarely without twist or diagonal racking.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS

− Location: Ensure correct positioning of DPC’s, DPM’s and/ or cavity closers in relation to window frames. Do not displace during fixing operation.

784 FIXING OF COMPOSITE FRAMES � As section TBC using galvanized mild steel cramps or as otherwise recommended

by the manufacturer. � When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fixing not more than 150 mm

from each end of jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of openings lights, and at maximum 600 mm centres.

� Fasteners appropriate to surrounding structure.

810 SEALANT JOINTS:

− Sealant manufacturer and reference: Adshead Ratcliffe Arbo LM low modulus silicone sealant or equivalent.

L10


− Brush joints clean and free from all dust etc wipe the joint interface with an approved solvent wipe and allow for drying. Insert a foam backing strip or bond breaker tape to back of joint. Apply the Arbo LM low modulus silicone mastic (joint size 10 to 15mm typically). Tool joint with a smooth stick to leave neat professional finish.

− Colour: To compliment or match window colour. − External seal

− Manufacturer: Compriband

− Range: Ilmod 600 tape, � Colour: Anthracite/RAL7030 Grey or black � Certification: BBA 96/3309 � Install windows into prepared opening, maintaining a 12m +/- 4mm gap. Tape is to

be placed between the wooden frame and window reveal. (Where there is a brick reveal the joint needs to be flush to ensure a suitable weather tight seal.)

820 IRONMONGERY:

− Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent damage to ironmongery and adjacent surfaces. Checking / adjusting / lubricating: At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

L20


L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches

L20


L20


L20 DOORS/ SHUTTERS / HATCHES To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE � Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated

components comply with specified performance requirements.

150 SITE DIMENSIONS

� Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.

170 CONTROL SAMPLES

� Procedure:

− Finalize component details. − Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity

required for the project.

− Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacturer of the remaining quantity.

PRODUCTS:

INTERNAL DOORS 150A SITE DIMENSIONS

• Procedure: Doorset manufacturer to fully schedule doorset requirements and to provide KEIR CONSTRUCTION with full details to allow construction of all openings.

235 TIMBER DOORSETS - INTERIOR LAMINATE VENEER FACED (SENTINEL FINGER

PROTECTION FRAME): 30 Minutes Fire Rated and 35 dB Rw Min. Acoustic Rated Doors.

� Drawing reference(s): Refer to plans and Door Schedule. � Manufacturer and reference: Integrated Doorset Solutions Limited, Spectrum Range

Sentinel interior doorsets or equivalent Youngs Doors � Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody. � Fire performance: See Door Schedule – 30 minutes. � Certification: BWF-CERTIFIRE. � Smoke control: Required fire-rated. � Acoustic performance: 35 dB Rw Min. As identified on door schedule. � Mechanical strength: Successfully tested to BS EN 12400 Class 8 (1 million cycles). � Mechanical durability: Successfully tested to BS EN 1192 Class4 severe duty. � Door leaf:

- Door leaf Core: EnduraCor severe duty with hardwood top and bottom rails and finger-jointed softwood stiles around core.

- Facings: Laminate overlipped with 2mm bevelled edges, colour ref. to be confirmed. - Lippings: Hardwood to all edges. Primed for painting on site by others. Colour ref. to

be confirmed by architect. - Finish as delivered: Facings - left clean; Lippings – Hyalux clear lacquer with

Hygienilac • Glazing details as required (see door schedule):

- Bead system: Hardwood flush bead, pinned, finish to match lippings. - Size and position of aperture(s): As per door type elevations. - Glass: 6.4mm laminated clear (Non-fire). 7mm Pyroguard clear (FD30). 15mm

Pyrostop clear (FD60) • Frame and architraves:

- Frame: Sentinel Barum 44mm section with 14mm separate stop

L20


- Architraves: 55 x 18mm required. - Material: Sustainable hardwood. Species to be confirmed by Architect. - Class (to BS EN 942): J30. - Finish as delivered: Primed for painting on site by others. - Material: Sustainable hardwood. Species to be confirmed by Architect. - Class (to BS EN 942): J30. - Finish as delivered: Hyalux clear lacquer with Hygienilac.

• Moisture content on delivery: 10 to 12%. • Ironmongery: As schedule. • Transom closers: Dorma ref. RTS75/80EMB, supplied and fixed by doorset

manufacturer.

• Fire seals: Standard type for this doorset, with intumescent seals rebated into frame.

• Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets. - Pivot set: Grade 304 satin stainless steel, supplied and fixed by doorset

manufacturer. - Locks: Factory morticed, supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer.

• Ironmongery to be surrounded by intrumescent pads or matting conforming to test standards of BS 476-22.

• Acoustic seals required: Frame head and jambs standard type for this doorset including Norsound 815 surface mounted drop-down seal to bottom of door face.

• Threshold: Not required. • Other requirements:

• Fire resisting doorsets to include FR discs, let in flush with door facing. Satin Stainless Steel Disks with black lettering.

- Meeting stiles for double/ door and a half doors to be light tight. Acoustic seals required.

• Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets. 240 TIMBER DOORSETS - INTERIOR LAMINATE VENEER (SENTINEL FINGER

PROTECTION FRAME) - 30 MINUTES FIRE RATED AND NON-ACOUSTIC RATED DOORS.


Sentinel interior doorsets or equivalent Youngs Doors � Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody. � Fire performance: See Door Schedule – 30 minutes. � Certification: BWF-CERTIFIRE. � Smoke control: Required fire-rated. � Acoustic performance: Not Required. � Mechanical strength: Successfully tested to BS EN 12400 Class 8 (1 million cycles). � Mechanical durability: Successfully tested to BS EN 1192 Class4 severe duty. � Door leaf:

- Door leaf Core: EnduraCor severe duty with hardwood top and bottom rails and finger-jointed softwood stiles around core.

- Facings: Laminate overlipped with 2mm bevelled edges, colour ref. to be confirmed. - Lippings: Hardwood to all edges. Primed for painting on site by others. Colour ref. to

be confirmed by architect. - Finish as delivered: Facings - left clean; Lippings – Hyalux clear lacquer with

Hygienilac � Glazing details as required (see door schedule):

- Bead system: Hardwood flush bead, pinned, finish to match lippings. - Size and position of aperture(s): As per door type elevations. - Glass: 6.4mm laminated clear (Non-fire). 7mm Pyroguard clear (FD30). 15mm

Pyrostop clear (FD60) � Frame and architraves:

- Frame: Sentinel Barum 44mm section with 14mm separate stop - Architraves: 55 x 18mm required. - Material: Sustainable hardwood. Species to be confirmed by Architect. - Class (to BS EN 942): J30.

L20


- Finish as delivered: Primed for painting on site by others. - Material: Sustainable hardwood. Species to be confirmed by Architect. - Class (to BS EN 942): J30. - Finish as delivered: Hyalux clear lacquer with Hygienilac.

• Moisture content on delivery: 10 to 12%. • Ironmongery: As schedule. • Transom closers: Dorma ref. RTS75/80EMB, supplied and fixed by doorset

manufacturer. � Fire seals: Standard type for this doorset, with intumescent seals rebated into frame. � Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets.

- Pivot set: Grade 304 satin stainless steel, supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer.

- Locks: Factory morticed, supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer. � Ironmongery to be surrounded by intrumescent pads or matting conforming to test

standards of BS 476-22. � Threshold: Not required. � Other requirements: � Fire resisting doorsets to include FR discs, let in flush with door facing. Satin

Stainless Steel Disks with black lettering. - Meeting stiles for double/ door and a half doors to be light tight.

� Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets.

250 TIMBER DOORSETS - INTERIOR LAMINATE-FACED DOUBLE ACTION: NON-

FIRE RATED AND NON-ACOUSTIC RATED DOORS / TO TOILETS/ WCs


interior doorsets or Youngs Doors. � Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody. � Fire performance: Non-rated � Acoustic performance: Not required. � Mechanical strength: Successfully tested to BS EN 12400 Class 8 (1 million cycles). � Door leaf Core: Lamcor.

- Facings: Laminate overlipped with 2mm bevelled edges, colour ref. to be confirmed.by Architect.

� Lippings: Hardwood to all edges. � Finish as delivered: Facings - left clean; Lippings – Hyalux clear lacquer with

Hygienilac. � Frame and architraves: � Frame: Barum 44 mm thick double action with 1 5mm radius edges. Mitre jointed.

Lock jamb fitted with ref. 37 567 emergency release stop. � Architraves: 55 x 18mm required. � Material: Sustainable hardwood. Species to be confirmed by Architect. � Class (to BS EN 942): J30. � Finish as delivered: Hyalux clear lacquer with Hygienilac. � Moisture content on delivery: 10 to 12%. � Ironmongery: As schedule. � Pivot: Ref. 37 569 double action pivot set, supplied and fixed by doorset

manufacturer. � Locks: Factory morticed, supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer.Fixing: Factory

drilled frames with matching pellets. � Privacy seals: Required. � Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets.

255 TIMBER DOORSETS - INTERIOR LAMINATE FACED (SINGLE ACTION):

� Drawing reference(s): Refer to plans, door elevations and Door Schedule. � Manufacturer and reference: Integrated Doorset Solutions Limited, Spectrum Range

interior doorsets or Youngs Doors. � Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody.

L20


� Fire performance: See Door Schedule. Certification: BWF-CERTIFIRE. � Smoke control: Required if fire-rated, using Norseal PS01 to comply with Equality Act

2010. � Acoustic performance: See Door Schedule. � Mechanical strength: Successfully tested to BS EN 12400 Class 8 (1 million cycles). � Mechanical durability: Successfully tested to BS EN 1192 Class4 severe duty. � Door leaf Core: Enduracor or Audiodor with finger-jointed softwood perimeter framing

around core. � Facings: Laminate overlipped with 2mm bevelled edges, colour ref. to be confirmed

by Architect. � Lippings: Hardwood to all edges. � Finish as delivered: Primed for painting on site by others. � Glazing details if required (see door schedule): � Bead system: Hardwood flush bead, pinned, finish to match lippings. � Size and position of aperture(s): As per door type elevations. � Glass: 6.4mm laminated clear (Non-fire). 7mm Pyroguard clear (FD30). 15mm

Pyrostop clear (FD60) � Frame and architraves: � Frame: Barum 32 mm thick 1.5mm radius edges and separate stop. Mitre jointed. � Architraves: 55 x 18mm required. � Material: Sustainable hardwood to suit fire performance. Species to be confirmed by

Architect. � Class (to BS EN 942): J30. � Finish as delivered: Hyalux clear lacquer with Hygienilac. � Moisture content on delivery: 10 to 12%. � Ironmongery: As schedule. � Hinges: Ref. 7730 satin zinc plated steel fixed pin hinge Grade 13 to BS EN 1935,

supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer. � Locks: Factory morticed, supplied and fixed by doorset manufacturer. � Fire seals, if required: Standard type for this doorset, with intumescent seals rebated

into frame. � Acoustic seals, if required: Frame head and jambs standard type for this doorset.

Bottom edge of leaf fitted with Norsound 810S concealed drop down seal. Threshold: Not required.

� Other requirements: For fire-rated doors, FR30 or FR60 discs to be let-in flush with door facing.

� Fixing: Factory drilled frames with matching pellets.

260 DOOR LININGS: INTERNAL � Drawing reference(s): Internal doors schedule

- Manufacturer and reference: to be supplied by contractor - Timber species: Hardwood - Preservative treatment: Double vacuum impregnation. - Moisture content on delivery: 10-14% - Finish: 32 x width of partition lining is fitted into; prepared and primed for painting. - Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelletted to masonry/metal studwork at @ 450mm

centres as clause 790 and section Z20. -

280 INTERNAL GLAZED SCREENS / WINDOWS � Drawing reference(s): Internal Windows & Screen Schedule

− Manufacturer and reference: to be supplied by Contractor − Materials generally: To BS 1186: Part 1. − Timber species: Hardwood

− Joinery workmanship: As Section Z20. − Acoustic performance: 45db

− Adhesive: Synthetic resin to BS 1204. − Moisture Content on delivery: 10-14%

− Accuracy: To BS 4787: Part 1.

L20


− Finish: Hyalux clear lacquer with Hygienilac. − Glazing: 6.4mm laminated clear (Non-fire). 7mm Pyroguard clear

(FD30). 15mm Pyrostop clear (FD60)

480 DOORS WITHIN CURTAIN WALLING

• Manufacturer: Kawneer UK Ltd, Runcorn, Cheshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Kawneer 190 Commercial Entrance door or equivalent.

• Material: Aluminium.

• Finish: Powder coating . - Colour/ texture: RAL TO BE CONFIRMED 30% gloss . - Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres .

• Fixing: As manufacturer’s Details. - Other requirements: All external doors to be fitted with finger guards and a

friction stay. � Glazing to consist of solar control double glazed units incorporating low

emissivity glass and argon filling. g values of 0.28 in a southerly, eastern and western orientations. Northern orientation 0.64.Inner and outer panes to be laminated and toughened glass respectively, with overall sound reduction of Rw30.

481 TIMBER DOORS WITHIN uPVC WINDOWS IN CLASSROOMS � Manufacturer: NorDan UK Ltd, 3 Almondview Office Park, Livingston, EH54

6SF Tel: 01506 433173

- Product reference: Balcony doors – Double out or equivalent. • Material: Timber .

• Finish: To be advised. - Colour/ texture: TO BE CONFIRMED - Frame: 92mm.

• Fixing: As manufacturer’s Details. - Other requirements: All external doors to be fitted with finger guards and a

friction stay. � Glazing to consist of solar control double glazed units incorporating low

emissivity glass and argon filling. g values of 0.28 in a southerly, eastern and western orientations. Northern orientation 0.64.Inner and outer panes to be laminated and toughened glass respectively, with overall sound reduction of Rw30.

485 INTERNAL DOORSETS; FLUSH SafeHinge anti finger trap

� Product Description: Integrated Door Finger Protection - Ironmongery Kit � Manufacturer: Safehinge Ltd, 2.6, The Hub, Pacific Drive, Glasgow, G51 1EA.

www.safehinge.com or equivalent. � Products Reference #:

- ALU30-100: Integrated door finger protection kit: including floor plate pivot set (adjustable on-site), intumescent and anodised aluminium door edge profile (44mm).

- ALU30-150: Integrated door finger protection kit: including L-bracket pivot set (adjustable on-site), intumescent and anodised aluminium door edge profile (44mm).

- ALU60-100: Integrated door finger protection kit: including floor plate pivot set (adjustable on-site), intumescent and anodised aluminium door edge profile (54mm).

- ALU60-150: Integrated door finger protection kit: including L-bracket pivot set (adjustable on-site), intumescent and anodised aluminium door edge profile (54mm).

� Previous Clauses apply � Laminated timber core to door leaf � To be supplied fitted to door sets when manufactured. �

L20


610 SECURITY SHUTTER TO SERVERY

� Supplier: BY GRATTE BROTHERS – tel.07753915560 Custom Model No. TBC

− Supply and fit electrically operated security shutters complete with manual override so the shutter can be operated in the event of a power failure. Operated by key switch The shutter shall be face fixed and have a safety brake. The shutter shall be powder coated to the Client colour choice from the colour chart we shall provide. Subject to a final site survey.

� Operation: Electrically operated via a single or three phase motor unit, complete with a governor gear incorporated within the motor gearbox to control the rate of descent mechanically in the event of a fire situation. Fitted with emergency hand chain facility for use in the event of power failure or emergency.

� Release: Solenoid release with auto reset connected to the fire alarm system. on receipt of a 24 volt , 0.5 amp DC signal, the shutter will be activated. (Providing mains power is available the release mechanism will automatically reset after a secondary solenoid is energised via the push button station).

� Other electrical options: provide battery back-up, time delay, audible and visual warning safety devices provide key switch to trolley bay shutter.

� Provide connection into fire alarm system. � Lock: Shutters to come complete with key lock and interlock switch.

EXECUTION:

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS � General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately

or placed in clean, dry floored and covered storage.

� Stored components: Stack vertical or near vertical on level bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

740 CORROSION PROTECTION

� Surfaces to be protected: surfaces of aluminium components, which will come into contact with mortar, concrete or plaster, or treated timber.

� Protective coating: Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949 or an approved mastic impregnated tape.

− Timing of application: Before fixing components.

750 FIXING DOORSETS

� Timing: After associated rooms have been made weathertight and the work of wet trades is finished and dried out.

760 BUILDING IN

� General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings. � Brace and protect components to prevent distortion and damage during

construction of adjacent structure.

780 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS � Location: Correctly positioned in relation to door frames. Do not displace during

fixing operations.

800 FIXING OF LOOSE THRESHOLDS

� Spacing of fixings: Maximum 150 mm from each end and at 600 mm maximum centres.

L20


820 SEALANT JOINTS

� Sealant: � Manufacturer: to contractor’s choice � Product reference: to contractor’ � Colour: to match finishes � Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Finish triangular fillets to a flat or

slightly convex profile.

830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY:

� Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Do not damage ironmongery and adjacent surfaces.

� Checking/ Adjusting/ Lubricating: Carry out at completion and ensure correct functioning.

850 LOCATION OF HINGES:

� Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250 mm from top and bottom of door leaf.

� Third hinge: Where specified, positioned refer to Internal Door Schedule drg. 5104.

� Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's recommendations.

�

860 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES:

� Standard: Unless specified otherwise, install panic bolts/ latches in accordance with BS EN 1125.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS � General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately

or placed in clean, dry, floored and covered storage. � Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to

prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

730 PRIMING/ SEALING � Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified

before fixing components.

750 FIXING DOORSETS � Timing: After associated rooms have been made weathertight and the work of

wet trades is finished and dried out.

760 BUILDING IN � General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

765 WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY

- Installation: Into prepared openings. - Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction: - Minimum: 9mm - Maximum: 15mm

- Distortion: Install windows squarely without twist or diagonal racking.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES ASSOCIATED WITH BUILT IN WOOD FRAMES � Method of fixing: To backs of frames using galvanized clout nails.

L20


780 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS � Location: Correctly positioned in relation to door frames. Do not displace

during fixing operations.

784 FIXING OF COMPOSITE FRAMES

− using galvanized mild steel cramps or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

− When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fixing not more than 150 mm from each end of jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of openings lights, and at maximum 600 mm centres.

− Fasteners appropriate to surrounding structure.

790 FIXING OF WOOD FRAMES � Spacing of fixings (frames not predrilled): Maximum 150 mm from ends of

each jamb and at 600 mm maximum centres.

800 FIXING OF LOOSE THRESHOLDS � Spacing of fixings: Maximum 150 mm from each end and at 600 mm

maximum centres.

810 FIRE RESISTING SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS � Gaps between frames and supporting construction: Filled as necessary in

accordance with requirements for certification and/ or door/ doorset manufacturer's instructions.

820 SEALANT JOINTS � Sealant manufacturer and reference: Adshead Ratcliffe Arbo LM low modulus

silicone sealant or equivalent. - Brush joints clean and free from all dust etc wipe the joint interface with an

approved solvent wipe and allow for drying. Insert a foam backing strip or bond breaker tape to back of joint. Apply the Arbo LM low modulus silicone mastic (joint size 10 to 15mm typically). Tool joint with a smooth stick to leave neat professional finish.

- Colour: To compliment or match window colour. - External seal - Manufacturer: Compriband - Range: Ilmod 600 tape, Colour: To be advised. Certification: BBA 96/3309

Install windows into prepared opening, maintaining a 12m +/- 4mm gap. Tape is to be placed between the wooden frame and window reveal. (Where there is a brick reveal the joint needs to be flush to ensure a suitable weather tight seal.)

825 IRONMONGERY: - Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with

matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent damage to ironmongery and adjacent surfaces.

- Checking / adjusting / lubricating: At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY � Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.

− Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery. � Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/ operation. � Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.

L20


� Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion.

840 FIXING IRONMONGERY TO FIRE RESISTING DOOR ASSEMBLIES � General: All items fixed in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's

recommendations ensuring that integrity of the assembly, as established by testing, is not compromised.

� Holes for through fixings and components: Accurately cut. - Clearances: Not more than 8 mm unless protected by intumescent

paste or similar. - Lock/ Latch cases for fire doors requiring > 60 minutes integrity

performance: Coated with intumescent paint or paste before installation

L40


L40


L40 General glazing

L40


L40 General glazing


FOR EXTERNAL DOORS AND WINDOWS GLAZING SPECIFICATION REFER SECTIONS L10 & L20


111 PREGLAZING � Preglazing of components: Permitted. � Prevention of displacement: Submit details of precautions to be taken to protect

glazing and compound/ seals during delivery and installation. � Defective/ displaced glazing/ compound/ seals: Reglaze components in situ.

150 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY � Glazing generally: To BS 6262. � Integrity: Glazing must be wind and watertight under all conditions with full

allowance made for deflections and other movements. � Dimensional tolerances: Panes/ sheets to be within ± 2 mm of specified

dimensions. � Materials:

− Compatibility: Glass/ plastics, surround materials, sealers, primers and paints/ clear finishes to be used together to be compatible. Avoid contact between glazing panes/ units and alkaline materials such as cement and lime.

− Protection: Keep materials dry until fixed. Protect insulating glass units and plastics glazing sheets from the sun and other heat sources.

152 PREPARATION � Surrounds, rebates, grooves and beads: Clean and prepare before installing

glazing.

155 GLASS GENERALLY � Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:

- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass. - BS EN 1096 for coated glass. - BS EN 1748-1 for borosilicate glass. - BS EN 1748-2 for ceramic glass. - BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass. - BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass. - BS EN 12337 for chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass. - BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass. - BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and laminated safety glass.

− Panes/ sheets: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, rippling, dimples and other defects.

− Edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.

160 LINEAR PATTERNED/ WIRED GLASS � Alignment: Vertical/ Horizontal as appropriate, and pattern matched across

adjacent panes in close proximity.

L40


165A HEAT SOAKING OF THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS � Standard: To BS EN 14179.

-- Mean glass temperature: 290° ± 10°C. � Certified evidence of treatment: Submit. � Designated locations: all toughenend glass.

170 PLASTICS GLAZING SHEET

• Condition: Free from scratches, edge splits and other defects. � Preparation for use: Protective coverings carefully peeled back from edges and

trimmed off to facilitate glazing. Remainder retained in place until completion unless instructed otherwise.

180 BEAD FIXING WITH PINS � Pin spacing: Regular at maximum 150 mm centres, and within 50 mm of each

corner. � Exposed pin heads: Punched just below wood surface.

181 BEAD FIXING WITH SCREWS � Screw spacing: Regular at maximum 225 mm centres, and within 75 mm of each

corner.

TYPES OF GLAZING

250 BEAD FIXED SINGLE GLAZING � Pane material: Pilkington Pyrostop. � Surround/ bead: Hardwood.

− Preparation: Sealant primer.

− Bead location: Both sides. − Bead fixing: 65 x 3 mm stainless steel woodscrews.

� Glazing system:

− Tape: Pre-formed butyl strip.

− Bead bedding sealant: Dufaylite Developments Ltd.

− Capping sealant: NA. � Glazing installation:

− Glass: Located centrally in surround using setting and location blocks.

− Glazing tape: Top edge approximately 6 mm short of sight line on external side of glazing, to allow for capping sealant. Corners butt jointed with no gaps.

− Thickness of glazing tape bed (minimum): 3 mm on both sides of glazing after compression.

− Beads: Bedded in sealant, pressed firmly into position to compress tape, and fixed securely.

− Excess tape on internal side: Carefully trimmed to a smooth chamfer.

− Capping sealant: Applied to fill void between bead and glazing and finished to a smooth chamfer.

505A FIRE RESISTANT GLAZING TO VISION PANELS IN INTERNAL DOORS � Fire resistance rating: SEE DOOR SCHEDULE DRAWING � Pane material: Refer L40

− Frame/ Surround material: Hardwood frame. � Beads:

− Material: Hardwood with chamfer.

− Fixing: 38 mm long No 8 stainless steel screws and cups at maximum 200 mm centres.

L40


� Installation: By a firm currently registered under a UKAS certified accreditation scheme for the installation of fire resistant glazing, in accordance with glazing manufacturer's recommendations.

560 MIRRORS TO TOILETS

- Drawing reference: See drawings - Mirror material: to BS 952: 6mm clear float, SG, silvered and protected with

copper backing, undercoat paint and stove enamel . Edges to be polished and mirrors to have 4mm dia, fixing holes pre-drilled.

- Fixing: plugging and screwing with brass screws, chromium plated domical covers and rubber surrounds and covers.

- Sizes: To match vanity units length x 450mm high in pupils toilet areas and 1000x450mm in disabled toilet,

- Background: blockwork, plastered. - Fixing method: screwed and capped. - Fix accurately and securely, but do not over tighten fastenings. Maintain

planimetry to ensure undistorted reflection both within and between adjoining panes.

M10



M10




TYPES OF SCREED

130 PROPRIETARY FIBRE REINFORCED SCREEDS TO FLOORS GENERALLY • Ground Floor Base: Refer P10/ 120 • Construction: Floating (allow for debonding to perimeter insulation) • Manufacturer and reference: CEMEX Readymix - Readyscreed F • tel. no. 01926 812671 • Cement: Cem I or Cem IIIa to BS EN 197. • Fine aggregate: To BS EN 12620, designation 0/4 MP or 0/2 MP, but with not more than 10%

passing sieve size 150 microns. • Mix design 1:4 Cement :Sand (28 day compressive strength of 27N/mm2) • Reinforcement: measured amount of polypropylene fibre for crack control to replace light mesh • Screed thickness/finish: 100mm min thickness (bearing in mind camber of floors), sanded and

primed to receive vinyl floor sheet/carpet finish. • The finish of the screeds should be such that the intended floor finish can be laid without the

need for additional treatment. i.e. levelling compounds, latex. Any subsequent work that is required to bring the screed up to the required quality will be deemed to be included within the cost of the screed or flooring.

160 PROPRIETARY SELF SMOOTHING LEVELLING SCREEDS TO ABUTMENTS WITH

EXISTING SCREEDS • Substrate: In situ concrete slab / screed. • Screed manufacturer: Ardex. - Product reference: Ardurapid. • Screed construction: Manufacturer's standard. • Thickness: - Nominal: 10 mm. - Minimum: 6 mm. - Maximum: 30mm. • Standards: Comply with BS 8204-7 'Pumpable self levelling screeds. Code of practice'. • In situ crushing resistance (ISCR) category: A (3 mm maximum indentation). - Mass of test weight: 2 kg. • Flatness/ Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation: SR2. • Finish to receive: Carpet tiles. • Other requirements: Movement joints .

GENERALLY/PREPARATION

205 DESIGN LIFE OF SCREEDS • Duration: 30 years . - Subject to reasonable wear and tear. • Location: all areas . • Condition of use: Subject to correct loading and traffic usage throughout duration.

210 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES • General: - Suitable for specified levels and flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces. Consider permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds. - Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps. • Concrete strength: To BS 8204-1, Table 2.

M10


• Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt. • Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or partially bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for minimum six weeks.

220 PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/WEARING SCREEDS • General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/maximum thicknesses and

workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of screed manufacturer. • Standard: To BS 8204-3.

250 CONDUITS UNDER FLOATING SCREEDS • Haunching: Before laying insulation for floating screeds, haunch up in 1:4 cement:sand on both

sides of conduits.

251 CONDUITS CAST INTO OR UNDER SCREEDS • Reinforcement: Overlay with reinforcement selected from: - 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49, or - Welded mesh manufactured in rolls from mild steel wire minimum 1.5 mm diameter to BS 1052,

mesh size 50 x 50 mm. • Placing reinforcement: Mid depth between top of conduit and the screed surface. - Screed cover over conduit (minimum): 25 mm.

255 PIPE DUCTS/ TRUNKING • Preformed access ducts: Before laying screed, fix securely to substrates and level accurately in relation to finished floor surface.

260 FULLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION • Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1. • Removing mortar matrix: Shortly before laying screed, expose coarse aggregate over entire area

of hardened substrate. • Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a full bond over complete area. • Bonding coat: Slurry, as clause 275.

270 PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION • Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1. • Substrate surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance. - Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete area. • Bonding coat: Manufacturer's standard.

275 CEMENT SLURRY BONDING • Slurry type: Neat cement. • Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well

wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement slurry bonding coat of creamy consistency.

• Screeding: While slurry is still wet.

280 UNBONDED CONSTRUCTION • Separation: Lay screed over a suitable sheet dpm or a separating layer. - Type: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 125 micrometres thick (500 gauge). • Installation of separating layer: Lay on clean substrate. Turn up for full depth of screed at

abutments with walls, columns, etc. Lap 100 mm at joints.

290 FLOATING CONSTRUCTION • Insulation:

M10


- Type: Refer P10/120 - Installation: Lay with tight butt joints. Continue up at perimeter abutments for full depth of screed. • Separating layer: - Type: Polyethylene sheet. Refer P10/120. - Installation: Lay over insulation and turn up at perimeter abutments. Lap 100 mm at joints.

BATCHING/MIXING

302 CEMENTS • Cement types: In accordance with BS 8204-1, clause 5.1.3.

305 AGGREGATES • Sand: To BS EN 13139. - Grading limits: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table B.1. • Coarse aggregates for fine concrete levelling screeds: - Standard: To BS EN 12620. - Designation: 4/10. • Lightweight aggregates: To BS 8204-1, Annex A.

307 ADMIXTURES • Standard: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table 1. • Calcium chloride: Do not use in admixtures.

330 MIXING • Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent excessive

water being brought to surface during compaction. • Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be

mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer. • Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction. • Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site temperatures recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.

335 IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR) • Standards and category: To BS 8204-1, table 4. - Testing of bonded and unbonded screeds: To Annex D. - Testing of floating levelling screeds: To Annex E.

340 ADVERSE WEATHER • Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5°C for a minimum of four days after laying. • Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.

LAYING

345 LEVEL OF SCREED SURFACES • Permissible deviation: (allowing for thickness of coverings) ±5 mm from datum.

351 SCREEDING TO RAMPS • Screed cover: Maintain consistent screed depth to graduated substrate. • Falls: Gradual and consistent.

355 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS • Standard: To BS 8204-1, Table 5.

M10


• Test: To BS 8204-1, Annex C. • Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.

375 COMPACTION OF SCREEDS • General: Compact thoroughly over entire area. • Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness. Roughen surface

of compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer.

382 STAIR SCREEDS • Construction: Fully bonded to treads, risers and landings. • Risers: Form using fine finish formwork. • Wearing screed surfaces: Make good with compatible cement:sand mix. Wood float. When

hardened remove laitance.

405 JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY • Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays. Minimize defined

joints. • Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.

428A HEATED SCREEDS - UNDERFLOOR HEATING

THE CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY WITH THE UNDERFLOOR HEATING DESIGNER / SUPPLIER THE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SCREEDS

• Substrate slab: Irregularities not permitted. • Screed bays, movement joints and other joints: Coordinate with heating circuits. • Heating elements: Secure properly. Prevent displacement. • Screed laying: Compact thoroughly around heating elements. Do not damage them.

440 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN LEVELLING SCREEDS

• Groove depth: At least half the depth of screed. • Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Select from the following: - Trowel cut as screed is laid. - Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to prevent random cracking.

445 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN WEARING SCREEDS • Groove dimensions: - Depth: At least half the depth of wearing screed. - Width: As narrow as possible. • Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Saw cut sufficiently early after

laying to prevent random cracking.

450 SEALANT FOR SAWN JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS • Type: Two part polysulfide-based, colour to approval. • Preparation and application: As section Z22.

476 METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTSGROUND FLOOR AND UPPER FLOORS • Manufacturer: CONTRACTORS CHOICE. - Product reference: stainless steel angle, 38 x 38mm. - Colour of insert: Manufacturer's standard colour range. • Bedding: 1:3 cement: sand. • Installation: Centre over joint in substrate. Set to exact finished level of floor. - Secure fixing to substrate: Stainless steel screws and washers at 300 mm centres.

M10


FINISHING/CURING

510 FINISHING GENERALLY • Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting and hardening of screed material. • Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces: - Wetting to assist surface working. - Sprinkling cement.

520 WOOD FLOATED FINISH • Finish: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.

530 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH • Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps.

540 TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS • Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps. • Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel marks and other

blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.

550 TROWELLED FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS • Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps. • Trowelling: Successively trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close surface and give

a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes. 650 CURING

• General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind, draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently, closely cover with polyethylene sheeting.

• Curing period (minimum): Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for: seven days. • Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to artificial drying conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related problems.

M20



M20




TYPES OF COATING

200 GYPSUM PLASTER ON CEMENT GAUGED UNDERCOATS • Substrate: Concrete blockwork as section F10. - Preparation: Not required. • Undercoats: - Mix: Group 3 mortar . - Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 10 mm (maximum) overall. • Final coat: Gypsum plaster to BS EN 13279-1. - Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. Product reference: Contractor's choice. - Thickness: 3-5 mm. - Finish: TROWELLED TO A SMOOTH TIGHT FINISH. • Accessories: Beads and stops .

205 CONTRACTORS ALTERNATIVE CHOICE GYPSUM HARDWALL PLASTER • Substrate: Concrete blockwork as section F10. - Preparation: Not required. • Undercoats: - Mix: British Gypsum Hardwall. - Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 11 mm (maximum) overall. • Final coat: Gypsum plaster to BS EN 13279-1. - Manufacturer: British Gypsum . Product reference: British Gypsum Multi finish. - Thickness: 2-3 mm. - Finish: TROWELLED TO A SMOOTH TIGHT FINISH. • Accessories: Beads and stops.

210 LIGHTWEIGHT GYPSUM PLASTER: ALL NEW BLOCK WALLS • Substrate: Concrete blockwork as section F10. - Preparation: Bonding agent recommended by plaster manufacturer. • Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd.. • Undercoats: To BS EN 13279-1. - Product reference: British Gypsum Thistle Hardwall. - Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 12mm. • Final coat: Finish plaster to BS EN 13279-1. - Product reference: British Gypsum Thistle Multi-Finish. - Thickness: 2-3 mm. - Finish: Smooth. • Seal between stop beads and external doors, windows, u/s of window board, etc. with continuous bead of clear polysulphide sealant. • Accessories: Expamet beads and stops to all door and window reveals, other abutments, expansion joints (2 stop beads back to back. Angle beads to all external arrisses. . • Generally, ALL external walls, with the exception of the plant room, are to be plastered full height from FFL to u/s of roof structure to aid air-tightness. Internal walls in areas of

M20


suspended ceilings are to be plastered a min of 75mm above the ceiling level.

280 GYPSUM PLASTER SKIM COAT ON PLASTERBOARD • Plasterboard: 12.5 mm . - Preparation: Bonding agent recommended by plaster manufacturer . • Plaster: Board finish/ finish plaster to BS EN 13279-1. - Manufacturer: British Gypsum Multi finish . Product reference: British Gypsum Multi finish . - Thickness: 2-3mm . - Finish: Smooth. • Accessories: Beads and stops GENERAL

421 SCAFFOLDING • General: Prevent putlog holes and other breaks in coatings.

MATERIALS AND MARKING OF MORTAR

438 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS • Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Types: Portland cement, CEM I. Portland slag cement, CEM II. Portland fly ash cement, CEM II. - Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5. • White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Type: Portland cement, CEM1. - Strength class: 52.5. • Sulphate resisting Portland cement: To BS 4027 and Kite marked. - Strength class: 42.5. • Masonry cement: To BS EN 998-1 and Kite marked.

440 SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS • Standard: To BS EN 13139. - Grading: 0/2 or 0/4 (CP or MP); Category 2 fines. • Colour and texture: Consistent. Obtain from one source.

449 ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS • Suitable admixtures: Select from: - Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible with other mortar

constituents. - Other admixtures: Submit proposals. • Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium chloride.

450 CHLORIDE CONTENT OF MORTARS • Chloride content (maximum): 0.1% by dry mass.

495 MIXING • Render mortars (site prepared): - Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets. - Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand. - Lime:sand: Mix thoroughly. Allow to stand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before using.

M20


• Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps. Do not retemper or reconstitute mixes. • Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

497 COLD WEATHER • General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings on frozen or frost bound substrates. • External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C and rising.

Maintain temperature of work above freezing until coatings have fully hardened. • Internal work: Take precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed without detriment when air temperature is below 3°C.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

510 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES • Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps. • Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and the like: Completed. • Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/ regularity of finished coatings. • Cleanliness: Free from dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other contaminants incompatible with coatings.

527 RAKING OUT FOR KEY • Joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum). - Dust and debris: Remove from joints.

531 ROUGHENING FOR KEY • Substrates: Roughen thoroughly and evenly. - Depth of surface removal: Minimum necessary to provide an effective key.

541 BONDING AGENT APPLICATION • General: Apply evenly to substrate to achieve effective bond of plaster/ render coat. Protect adjacent joinery and other surfaces.

551 REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF EXISTING PLASTER/ RENDER • Location and extent: Agree, at least on a provisional basis, before work commences. Minimize extent of removal and renewal.

566 REMOVING DEFECTIVE EXISTING PLASTER • Plaster for removal: Detached, soft, friable, badly cracked, affected by efflorescence or otherwise damaged. - Hollow, detached areas: Obtain instructions. • Stained plaster: Remove. • Removing defective plaster. Cut back to a square, sound edge. • Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, damp, etc.): Submit proposals. • Cracks: - Fine hairline cracking/ crazing: Leave. - Other cracks: Cracks1-2 mm wide: Scribe ready for filling with nonhydraulic lime putty. • Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges.

568 EXISTING DAMP AFFECTED PLASTER/ RENDER • Plaster affected by rising damp: Remove to a height of 300 mm above highest point reached by damp or 1 m above dpc, whichever is higher. • Perished and salt contaminated masonry: - Mortar joints: Rake out.

M20


- Masonry units: Submit proposals. • Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, additional sources of damp, etc.): Submit proposals. • Drying out substrates: Establish drying conditions. Leave walls to dry for as long as possible before plastering. • Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges. BACKINGS/ BEADS/ JOINTS

600 ADDITIONAL FRAMING SUPPORTS FOR BACKINGS • Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to fixtures, fittings and service outlets. • Support board edges and perimeters: As recommended by board manufacturer to suit type and performance of board.

605 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS • Type: To BS EN 520 Type I. - Core density (minimum): 650 kg/m³. • Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified plaster finish.

607 PROPRIETARY GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS • Manufacturer: British Gypsum. - Product reference: Wallboard or Fireline. • Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified plaster finish.

610 FIXING PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS TO TIMBERGENERALLY • Fixings, accessories and installation methods: As recommended by board manufacturer. • Fixing: At the following centres (maximum): - Nails: 150 mm. - Screws to partitions/ walls: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external angles. - Screws to ceilings: 230 mm. • Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum): - Bound edges: 10 mm. - Cut/ unbound edges: 13 mm. • Position of nails/ screws from edges of supports (minimum): 6 mm. • Nail/ screw heads: Set below surface. Do not break paper or gypsum core.

612 JOINTS IN PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS • Ceilings: - Bound edges: At right angles to supports and with ends staggered in adjacent rows. - Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers. • Partitions/ walls: - Vertical joints: Centre on studs. Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs. Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers. - Horizontal joints: Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm. Support edges of outer layer. • Joint widths (maximum): 3 mm.

630 BEADS/ STOPS FOR INTERNAL USEGENERALLY • Material: Galvanized steel to BS EN 13658-1.

634 BEADS/ STOPSGENERALLY • Manufacturer: EXPAMET OR OTHER APPROVED.

M20


- Product reference: Proprietry. • Material: Galvanized steel.

636 BEADS/ STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USETO STO RENDER • Material: Stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1, grade 1.4301.

640 BEADS/ STOPS GENERALLY • Location: External angles and stop ends except where specified otherwise. • Corners: Neat mitres at return angles. • Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate. - Beads/ stops for external render: Fix mechanically. • Finishing: After coatings have been applied, remove surplus material while still wet, from surfaces of beads/ stops exposed to view.

646 CRACK CONTROL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID SUBSTRATES • Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar solid substrate materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied together. • Crack control materials: - Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521. - Metal lathing: Internally: Galvanized steel plain expanded metal with spacers. • Installation: Fix metal lathing over isolating layer. Stagger fixings along both edges of lathing. • Width of installation over single junctions: - Isolating layer: 150 mm. - Lathing: 300 mm. • Width of installation across face of dissimilar substrate material (column, beam, etc. with face width not greater than 450 mm): - Isolating layer: 25 mm (minimum) beyond junctions with adjacent substrate. - Lathing: 100 mm (minimum) beyond edges of isolating layer.

650 MOVEMENT JOINTSINTERNALLY • Manufacturer: Contractors choice. - Product reference: NA. • Installation: Centred over joint in substrate. - Fixing: Stainless steel screws.

653 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH STOP BEAD EDGINGSAT COLUMN - WALL JUNCTIONS • Stop beads: GALVANISED STEEL. • Installation: Centred over joint in substrate. - Joint width: To allow ± 3mm movement. - Fixing: STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS. • Sealant: - Manufacturer: Adshead Ratcliffe Ltd. Product reference: Arbocol. - Preparation and application: As section Z22. gun applied and tooled finish.

659 PLASTERBOARD JOINTS • Joints and angles (except where coincident with metal beads). Reinforce with continuous lengths of jointing tape.

673 PLASTERING OVER CONDUITS/ SERVICE CHASES • General: Prevent cracking over conduits and other services.

M20


• Services chased into substrate: Isolate from coating by covering with galvanized metal lathing, fixed at staggered centres along both edges.

INTERNAL PLASTERING

710 APPLICATION GENERALLY • Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints. Achieve good adhesion. • Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks and crazing. - Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square. • Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.

715 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY • Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. • Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed anywhere on surface. - Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: 3 mm in any consecutive length of 1800 mm.

718 JUNCTION OF NEW PLASTERWORK WITH EXISTING • New plasterwork: Finish flush with original face of existing plasterwork to form a seamless junction.

720 DUBBING OUT • General: Correct substrate inaccuracies. • New smooth dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless total plaster thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer. • Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 10 mm. • Mix: As undercoat. • Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next is applied. Cross scratch surface of each coat.

725 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY • General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next coat. • Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key. • Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying shrinkage is substantially complete.

777 SMOOTH FINISH • Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks. Avoid water brush, excessive trowelling and over polishing.

M30


M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for plastered coatings

M30


M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for plastered/ rendered coatings


TYPES OF LATH/ REINFORCEMENT

110 METAL LATH TO UNEVEN EXISTING BACKGROUNDS • Substrate: existing plaster and masonry • Lath: expamet. - Grade: galvanised metal lath. - Finish: galvanised • Additional requirements: apply to complete the preparation of suitable backgrounds/dissimilar materials. PRODUCTS

215 METAL LATH • Internal applications: Flat, corrugated and ribbed expanded lath to BS EN 13658-1. • External applications: Flat, corrugated and ribbed expanded lath to BS EN 13658-2. • Galvanized steel: To BS EN 10327 and BS EN 10143. • Stainless steel: To BS EN 10088-1 and -2, number 1.4301 (name X5CrNi18-10).

235 WIRE

• Zinc coated mild steel wire: - Wire ties: Soft annealed steel tying wire. - Wire: To BS 10218-2. - Zinc coating: To BS EN 10244-2. • Stainless steel wire: To BS EN 10088-3, number 1.4301 or 1.4541 (name X5CrNi18-10 or

X6CrNiTi18-10).

245 SPIRAL WRAPPING AND STIRRUPS FOR CASINGS • Spiral wrapping: Form from 3 mm wire. • Stirrups: Form from either: - 6 mm wire; or - 19 x 10 mm galvanized steel channel.

265 BUILDING PAPER • Type: Water resistant breather paper. • Standard: To BS 4016.

285 FIXINGS • Nails: 38 x 2 mm galvanized steel clout nails to BS 1202-1. • Staples: 32 x 2 mm galvanized steel.

EXECUTION

325 SUPPORTS • Fixing: Secure, rigid and accurate.

375 FIXING BUILDING PAPER • Installation: Start from the bottom. Fix in horizontal lengths with clout nails or staples. - Laps: 100 mm.

M30


395 FIXING METAL LATH • Expanded metal lath to metal: 1.2 mm wire ties. • Ribbed metal lath to metal: 1.6 mm wire ties, or doubled 1.2 mm wire ties. • Welded mesh and paper lath to metal: 1.2 mm wire ties. • Fixing to runners: 1.2 mm wire ties. • Wire ties: Twist ends tightly together, cut off surplus and bend ends of wire away from face of

coating. • Fixing to timber: Select from nails or staples.

M40


M40

Stone/ concrete/quarry/ceramic tiling/mosaic

M40


M40 Stone/ concrete/ quarry/ ceramic tiling/ mosaic


TYPES OF TILING/ MOSAIC

110 TILING WHERE IDENTIFIED ON FINISHES PLAN • Tiles: GLAZED CERAMIC. - Manufacturer/ Supplier: H & R Johnson. Product reference: ALPN1A. - Colour: CONTRAST TO BS8300/ DDA REQUREMENTS. TO BE ADVISED FOLLWING

SIGN-OFF WITH CLIENT ON ALL COLOUR CHOICES. - Finish: Glazed. - Size: 300 x 250 mm. - Thickness: 6 mm. - Slip potential:

Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum)/ Pendulum test value (PVT) (minimum) to BS 7932 or BS EN 14231 (natural stone only): NA.

Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: Not applicable. - Recycled content: 9% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021. • Background/ Base: HARDI BAKER BOARD. - Preparation: SBR bonding agent to existing wall tiles. • Intermediate substrate: Not required. • Bedding: Bal-Thin bed adhesive - solid bed, as clause 740. - Reinforcement: Not applicable. - Adhesive: BAL Adhesives Ltd recommended for locations. • Joint width: As spacer lugs. • Grout: White. - Type/ classification: BAL Micro-Epoxy Epoxy Grout. • Movement joints: NA. • Accessories: bullnose tiles to edges, capping strips and tile - floor covering capping strips.

GENERAL

210 SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES • Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces

given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding. • New background drying times (minimum): - Concrete walls: 6 weeks. - Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks. - Rendering: 2 weeks. - Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks. • New base drying times (minimum): - Concrete slabs: 6 weeks. - Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.

PREPARATION

310 EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/BASES GENERALLY • Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove. • Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding: Remove. • Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean. • Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.

324 LIGHTWEIGHT/MEDIUM WEIGHT BLOCKWORK - Blockwork must be a minimum of 6 weeks old and fully dry prior to commencement of tiling. - It must be ensured that the background is sufficiently flat and fairfaced to receive a tile finish.

M40


- All traces of dust, laitance, etc should be fully removed. - The blockwork should be primed with Norcros Prime Bond diluted 1:4 with water. 380 NEW PLASTER

• Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter. • Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

400 BACKGROUNDS: Hardi Baker board to all areas to be tiled • Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings. • Surfaces to be tiled: Seal or prime if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

FIXING

510 FIXING GENERALLY • Colour/shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/room are not permitted. - Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly. • Adhesive: Compatible with background/base. Prime if recommended by adhesive

manufacturer. • Cut tiles: Neat and accurate. • Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/base and tile backs. • Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give true,

regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions. • Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.

530A SETTING OUT • Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps. - Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners. - Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features. • Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively. • Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align. • Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align. • Movement joints: Where locations are not indicated, submit proposals. • Setting out of tiles to be centred on walls and commence with a full tile immediately above

coved flooring or skirtings.

550 FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING • Sudden irregularities: Not permitted. • Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed

anywhere on surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should be greater than 3 mm.

560 LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS • Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint: - 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide. - 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.

650 THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS) • Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of approximately

1 m². Trowel to ribbed profile. • Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.

651 THIN BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS) • Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of about 1 m². Comb surface. • Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float coat. • Finished adhesive thickness (maximum): 3 mm.

M40


MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

815 • SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS by Adshead Radcliffe, tel. 01773 826661 • Ensure that joints extend through tiles and bedding to substrate and that they coincide with

any movement joints in the substrate. • Joint width: 6x6 mm. • Sealant: ARBOKOL 1025. • Colour: TO BE CONFIRMED. • Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.

875 GROUTING • Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of tiles. • Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris. • Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from blemishes. - Profile: Slightly concave. • Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.

M60


M50 Rubber/ plastics/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting

M60


M50 Rubber/ plastics/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting


TYPES OF COVERING

110 BARRIER MATTING • Location: Lobby & other external door areas - refer to Finishes Plans. - Base: new or existing screed

Preparation: thoroughly clean and vacuum floor to remove all dust, etc. Paint as M60/180A - Roll width - 2 and 4 metres

Thickness: 12mm (nominal) Manufacturer and reference: Heckmondwike (01924 413637) – “Battleship/Hippo Entrance Area

Carpet” Entrance matting. – Colour/pattern: TO BE ADVISED FOLLWING SIGN-OFF WITH CLIENT ON ALL COLOUR CHOICES. Method of laying: fully adhered with F balls F3 or Laybond L47CV

- Accessories: carpet strips to each doorway

110A PVC u SHEETING to KITCHEN WALLS, WINDOWS CILLS IN KITCHEN: SPLASHBACKS OVER WASH HAND BASINS AND SINKS

• Location: As per finishes plans. • Base: Plaster. - Preparation: Surface sound and free from all contaminates. Dusty or friable surfaces to be stabilised using appropriate stabilising solution. • Fabricated underlay: Not required. • Flooring roll: . - Manufacturer: Altro Walls, 48 Pinbush Road, South Lowestoft Industrial Estate, Lowestoft, Suffolk NR33 7NL. Tel: 01502 561364, Fax: 01502 588848, Email: [email protected] Web: www.altro.com. Product reference: Altro Whiterock Pastels semi rigid PVCu cladding. - BS EN 685 class: n/a. - Width: 1220 mm. - Thickness: 2.5 mm. - Colour/ pattern: TO BE ADVISED FOLLWING SIGN-OFF WITH CLIENT ON ALL COLOUR

CHOICES. • Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Consult with Altro. • Seam welding: Consult with Altro. • Accessories: Proprietry skirting and trims as recommended by manufacturer. • Finishing: Sweep/vacuum, damp mopping with neutral detergent. • Other requirements: None.

120 CARPET TILING: • Location: Refer to Finishes Drawing. • Base: Sand/cement screed. - Preparation: As clause 460. • Fabricated underlay: Not applicable. • Carpet tiles: - Manufacturer: Heckmondwike FB a Division of National Floorcoverings Ltd, West Yorkshire, or equivalent. Product reference: Supacord, or equivalent. - Type: Fibre bonded carpet tiles. - BS EN 1307 classification:.

M60


Level of use class: 3. - Recycled content: Submit proposals. - Size: 500 x 500mm. - Colour/ pattern: TO BE ADVISED FOLLWING SIGN-OFF WITH CLIENT ON ALL

COLOUR CHOICES. • Method of laying: Fully adhere all tiles with release adhesive recommended by the

manufacturer.. • Accessories: Edging strip at thresholds as clause 740. • Other requirements: Skirting as per P10 Spec. clause 130 VINYL SHEET FLOORING:

-Location: refer to Finishes Plans Base: new or existing screed

Preparation: Include for latex only if screed finish is not adequate for vinyl to be laid direct. (See M10/130)

- Manufacturer and reference: GERFLOR Tarasafe “Ultra” slip resistant vinyl sheet flooring with welded joints.

Size: 2000 mm wide rolls Thickness: 2 mm

Colour/pattern: TO BE ADVISED FOLLWING SIGN-OFF WITH CLIENT ON ALL COLOUR CHOICES.

-Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): All as manufacturer’s instructions. -Accessories: Gradus cove former CF38 and top edge capping seal PCS40 for 100mm high

coved skirtings. Provide and fit Gradus tile capping seal TC48 where wall tiling meets vinyl coved skirting. Fix with cartridge adhesive.

- Finishing: hot welded joints - Special requirements: clear silicon seal to all abutments, fixed furniture and timber skirtings, linings, architraves, etc.

210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY • Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and other contaminants. • Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.

220 SAMPLES • Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each type.

270 EXTRA MATERIAL • Provision of extra material: At completion, hand to Employer extra material of each type of

covering – 2 boxes of carpet tiles of M50/130 and 130A.

330 COMMENCEMENT • Required condition of works prior to laying materials: - Building is weathertight and well dried out. - Wet trades have finished work. - Paintwork is finished and dry. - Conflicting overhead work is complete. - Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are to be cut are

fixed. • Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.

340 CONDITIONING • Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where they are to be

laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a

M60


supporting surface. • Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by manufacturer with time

extended by a factor of two for materials stored or transported at a temperature of less than 10°C immediately prior to laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT • Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied. • Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.

360 FLOORS WITH UNDERFLOOR HEATING • Commencement of laying: Not before a period of 48 hours after heating has been turned off. • Post laying start up of heating system: Slowly return heating to its operative temperature not less

than 48 hours after completing laying. PREPARING BASES

410 NEW BASES • Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coverings will be

taken as acceptance of suitability.

420 EXISTING BASES • Notification: Before commencing work, confirm that existing bases will, after preparation, be suitable to receive coverings. • Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coverings will be

taken as acceptance of suitability.

430 NEW WET LAID BASES • Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing. • Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A or BS 8203,

Annexe A. Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over area being tested. • Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS • Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.

460 SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND • Type: Latex cement. • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice.

470 BASES FROM WHICH EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS HAVE BEEN REMOVED • Substrate: Clear of covering and as much adhesive as possible. Skim with smoothing

underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface.

LAYING COVERINGS

610 SETTING OUT TILES

M60


• Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible: - Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size. - Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

620 COLOUR CONSISTENCY • Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.

640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY • Adhesive type: As specified, as recommended by covering/ underlay, manufacturer or as

approved. • Primer: Type and usage as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. • Application: As necessary to achieve good bond. • Finished surface: Free from trowel ridges, high spots caused by particles on the substrate, and

other irregularities. 650 SEAMS

• Patterns: Matched. • Joints: Tight without gaps.

680 SEAM WELDING COVERINGS • Commencement: At least 24 hours after laying, or after adhesive has set. • Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.

700 LOOSE LAID CARPET TILES • Areas of adhered tiles: Secure using double sided tape or peelable adhesive. • Joints: Butted. - Perimeter joints: Accurately cut to match abutment and prevent movement.

720 DOORWAYS • Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.

740 EDGINGS AND COVER STRIPS • Manufacturer: Gradus Accessories, Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire, or equivalent approved. . - Product reference: Gradus TA16 or equivalent. • Material/ finish: Aluminium . • Fixing: Secure with edge of covering gripped. Use matching fasteners where exposed to view

750 STAIR NOSINGS AND TRIMS • Manufacturer: Gradus Accessories, Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire, or equivalent approved.. - Product reference: Type ELR 5140 or equivalent.. • Material/ finish: Aluminium. • Fixing: Secure, level and with mitred joints. Adjusted to suit thickness of covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Nosings and packing strips bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by nosing manufacturer. - Screw fixing with matching plugs: Fixings to be hidden as manufacturer's details..

770 SKIRTINGS • Types: PVC cove formers. • Manufacturer: as flooring supplier. - Product reference: as flooring material. • Fixing: Secure with top edge straight and parallel with floor.

M60


- Corners: Mitre joints.

780 TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING • Covering types: M50/110A - 160. • Traffic free period: seven days.

COMPLETION

820 FINISHING PLASTICS FLOORING • Cleaning operations: - Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If necessary, lightly scrub soiled

areas. - Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive. Allow to dry. • Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by covering manufacturer.

880 WASTE • Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching. On completion submit pieces for selection. Hand over selected pieces to Employer.

M60


M60

Painting/clear finishing

M60


M60 Painting/clear finishing


COATING SYSTEMS

110A EGGSHELL PAINT: INTERNAL PLASTERED SURFACES, FAIRFACE BLOCKWORK, PIPE CASINGS, ROOF LIGHT LININGS, BLOCKWORK, ETC.

• Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings, Batley, West Yorkshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell or equivalent. • Surfaces: Plasterboard walls. - Preparation: As clause 400. • Initial coats: 10% thinned primer. - Number of coats: one. • Undercoats: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell. - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell. - Number of coats: one.

110B EGGSHELL PAINT: INTERNAL PLASTER SURFACES, FAIRFACE BLOCKWORK, PIPE CASINGS, ROOF LIGHT LININGS, BLOCKWORK, ETC.

• Manufacturer: Crown. - Product reference: • Surfaces: Plaster, MDF, concrete blockwork. - Preparation: as clause 400 • Initial coats: Mist coat - Number of coats: 1 • Finishing coats: Water based eggshell paint Number of coats: 2 no.

110C EGGSHELL PAINT TO MASONRY • Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings, Batley, West Yorkshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell or equivalent. • Surfaces: Fair faced blockwork. - Preparation: As clause 400. • Initial coats: Johnstone's Ultra Primer/Sealer. - Number of coats: one spot coat to filled areas, one full coat. . • Undercoats: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell. - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Johnstone's Acrylic Eggshell. Number of coats: one. 110D EMULSION PAINT MATT TO INTERNAL PLASTERBOARD CEILINGS

• Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings, Batley, West Yorkshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Johnstone's Acrylic Durable Matt Emulsion or equivalent. • Surfaces: Plasterboard ceilings. - Preparation: As clause 400. • Initial coats: 10% thinned primer. - Number of coats: one. • Undercoats: Johnstone's Acrylic Durable Matt Emulsion. - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Johnstone's Acrylic Durable Matt Emulsion. Number of coats: one

M60


113 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/VARNISH/PRESERVATIVE • Manufacturer: Sadolin • Surface: planed timber. • Preparation: As Clause 400 with a clear base coat • Initial Coats: 2 cts. _Classic_ • Finishing Coats: 2cts. High Performance Varnish.

114 FINISHING TO INTERNAL DOORS • Surface: Timber veneer and hardwood lipping. • Preparation: N/A – doors are pre-finished

115 COATING TO SHELVING • Surface: plywood, s.w. lipped • Preparation: lightly sanded • 2cts clear polyurethane, gloss finish

116 GLOSS PAINTEXTERNAL EXPOSED TIMBER • Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings, Batley, West Yorkshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Johnstone's Stormshield Flexible System (solvent based) or equivalent. • Surfaces: Previously decorated. - Preparation: As clause 440. • Initial coats: Johnstone's Exterior Preservative. - Number of coats: one. • Undercoats: Stormshield Flexible Undercoat. . - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Stormshield Flexible Gloss. - Number of coats: one.

117 GLOSS PAINTINTERNAL TIMBER • Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings, Batley, West Yorkshire or equivalent. - Product reference: Johnstone's Aqua System (water based) or equivalent. • Surfaces: New Timber. - Preparation: As clause 400. • Initial coats: Johnstone's Joncryl Water Based Primer. - Number of coats: one. • Undercoats: Aqua Undercoat. . - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Aqua Gloss. - Number of coats: one

119 COATING TO EXTERNAL STEELWORK • Clean and degrease with sugar soap • Apply 1 ct of passivating wash. • Apply 1 ct of zinc phosphate primer • Initial coat(s): 2 coats Undercoat • Finishing coats: 2 coats high impact gloss paint

120 EXPOSED METAL PIPEWORK • Manufacturer: Crown • Surface(s): Exposed iron and copper pipework. • Preparation: Deburring and Primer to suit Galv - As clause 400 • Initial coat(s): 2 coats Undercoat • Finishing coats: 2 coats high impact gloss paint

M60


130 FLOOR COATING TO PLANT ROOMS • Manufacturer: Watco UK Limited, Godalming, Surrey, or equivalent. - Product reference: Epoxy Floor Shield or equivalent. • Surfaces: Concrete or sand and cement screed. - Preparation: Dustproofed and sealed. • Initial coats: As recommended by manufacturer. - Number of coats: one. • Finishing coats: Epoxy Floor Shield. - Number of coats: One. - Slip resistance value - water wet (minimum): Not applicable.

160 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/VARNISH/PRESERVATIVE TO EXPOSED TIMBER SURFACES • Manufacturer: as clause 210 • Product Reference – n/a

• Surfaces – Bare timber

• Preparation as clause 481 • Initial coats: Thin coat of lacquer/stain

- Number of coats : one • Finishing coats: Two full coats lacquer/stain

- Number of coats: two

161 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/VARNISH/PRESERVATIVE TO FIRE RATED TIMBER SURFACES

• Manufacturer: Albi max or similar 1 hr FR Class A surface spread of flame • Product Reference – n/a

• Surfaces – Bare timber

• Preparation as clause 481 • Initial coats: as recommended by manufacturer

- Number of coats : one • Finishing coats: Brush applied two full coats

- Number of coats: two

162 GLOSS PAINTEDDOOR LININGS, ARCHITRAVES, TRIMS, SKIRTINGS, ETC • Manufacturer: Crown • Surface: planed timber. • Preparation: As Clause 400 with a primer • Initial Coats: 2 cts. undercoat • Finishing Coats: 2cts. Gloss paint

165 SPREAD OF FLAME PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL TIMBER SURFACES • Manufacturer: Nullifire • Nullifire thin film System W+ is an intumescent coating system designed to provide spread-of-flame protection for internal natural timber surfaces • Surface(s): Exposed KLH timber – ventilation ducts • Initial coat(s): system W+ base coat • Finishing coats: system W top seal

166 Eggshell paint to Walls – Anti-bacterial: C/S Wallglaze® - Wallflex® • Manufacturer: Construction Specialties (UK) Ltd, 1010 Westcott Venture Park, Westcott HP18 0XB Tel: 01296 652800 Fax: 01296 652888 Email: [email protected]. Web: www.c-sgroup.co.uk. • Product reference: C/S Wallglaze® - Wallflex®

M60


• Primer: One coat of C/S White PrimerTM, at 7-9 m²/ ltr. - For plaster/plasterboard in dry areas. One coat of C/S Multi Surface PrimerTM, at 6-14 m²/ltr. - For ceramic tiles, brickwork/blockwork,

melamine surfaces, vibro-concrete and wet areas. One coat of C/S Plastic PrimerTM, at 12-15 m²/ltr. - For plastics.

• Flexible mastic: C/S Hygienic MasticTM required at corners, adjoining dissimilar substrates, etc. Mastic not required.

• Undercoat: One coat of C/S Universal UndercoatTM, at 9-11m²/ltr. - Required only for application over White Primer.

• Topcoat: Two coats of C/S Wallflex® Topcoat Eggshell, at 8-10 m²/ltr. • Colour: White.

GENERALLY

210 COATING MATERIALS • Manufacturers: Obtain materials from any of the following: Crown, Dulux,Permoglaze, Sadolins, ARCO Ltd.. • Selected manufacturers: Submit names before commencement of coating work.

215 HANDLING AND STORAGE • Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name, type of

material and manufacturer's batch number. • Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or areas of the

work.

220 COMPATIBILITY • Coating materials selected by contractor: - Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions of exposure. - Compatible with each other. - Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant pretreatments.

240 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED • Pre-finished items.

280 PROTECTION • 'Wet paint' signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other operatives and general

public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.

320 INSPECTION BY COATING MANUFACTURERS • General: Permit manufacturers to inspect work in progress and take samples of their materials from site if requested. PREPARATION

400 PREPARATION GENERALLY • Standard: In accordance with BS 6150. • Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method

statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.

• Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared. • Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating. • Efflorescence salts: Remove.

M60


• Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has occurred. • Surface irregularities: Remove. • Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill flush with surface, to provide smooth finish. • Dust, particles and residues from preparation: Remove and dispose of safely. • Water based stoppers and fillers: - Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. - If applied after priming: Patch prime. • Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming. • Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: - Ease, if necessary, before coating. - Prime resulting bare areas.

425 IRONMONGERY • Removal: Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated. • Hinges: Do not remove. • Replacement: Refurbishment as necessary; refit when coating is dry.

430 EXISTING IRONMONGERY • Refurbishment: Remove old coating marks. Clean and polish.

440 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY • Preparation: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 11.5. • Contaminated or hazardous surfaces: Give notice of: - Coatings suspected of containing lead. - Substrates suspected of containing asbestos. - Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates. • Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work. • Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacent surfaces or adversely affect subsequent coatings. • Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to a firm edge. • Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove. • Retained coatings: - Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, grease and contaminants. - Gloss coated surfaces: Provide key. • Partly removed coatings: - Additional preparatory coats: Apply to restore original coating thicknesses. - Junctions: Provide flush surface. • Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces.

461 PREVIOUSLY COATED WOOD • Degraded or weathered surface wood: Take back to provide suitable substrate. • Degraded substrate wood: Repair with sound material of same species. • Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

490 PREVIOUSLY COATED STEEL • Defective paintwork: Remove to leave a firm edge and clean bright metal. • Sound paintwork: Provide key for subsequent coats. • Corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal. • Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution. • Bare metal: Apply primer as soon as possible. • Remaining areas: Degrease.

M60


500 PREPRIMED STEEL • Areas of defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal. Reprime as soon as possible.

511 GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL • White rust: Remove. • Pretreatment: Apply one of the following: - 'T wash'/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface. - Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.

521 UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING • Oil and grease: Remove. • Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Remove. • Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution. • Primer: Apply as soon as possible.

541 UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/ COPPER/ LEAD • Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly key surface. • Pretreatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system manufacturer.

552 UNCOATED PVC-U • Dirt and grease: Remove. Do not abrade surface.

560 UNCOATED CONCRETE • Release agents: Remove.

631 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED WINDOWS FRAMES • Paint encroaching beyond glass sight line: Remove. • Loose and defective putty: Remove. • Putty cavities and junctions between previously painted surfaces and glass: Clean thoroughly. • Finishing: - Patch prime, reputty as necessary, and allow to harden. - Seal and coat as soon as sufficiently hard.

645 SEALING OF INTERNAL MOVEMENT JOINTS • General: To junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and other trims. • Sealant: Water based acrylic. - Manufacturer: contractors choice. Product reference: decorators caulk. - Preparation and application: As section Z22.

651 EXISTING GUTTERS • Dirt and debris: Remove from inside of gutters. • Defective joints: Clean and seal with suitable jointing material.

APPLICATION

711 COATING GENERALLY • Application standard: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 9. • Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during application and drying. • Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application. • Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer. • Overpainting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.

M60


• Priming coats: - Thickness: To suit surface porosity. - Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed. • Finish: - Even, smooth and of uniform colour. - Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects. - Cut in neatly. • Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating and between coats.

730 WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES • General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.

731 SITE COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES • General: After priming, apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be concealed when fixed in Place. - Components: Built in window & door frames. - Additional coatings: One undercoat.

751 STAINING WOOD • Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer. • Application: Apply in flowing coats and brush out excess stain to produce uniform appearance.

760 VARNISHING WOOD • First coat: Thin with white spirit. - Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration. • Subsequent coats: Rub down lightly along the grain between coats.

770 EXTERNAL DOORS • Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.

780 BEAD GLAZING TO COATED WOOD • Before glazing: Apply first two coats to rebates and beads.

800 GLAZING • Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to protect from contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.

M61


M61 Intumescent Coatings For Fire Protected Steelwork

M61


M61 Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelwork

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS

150 OFF SITE COATING TO UNPRIMED STEEL UB and UC sections • Use/ Location: All steel frame members below roof structure. • Fire resistance to BS 476-21: 60 minutes. • Preparation: Blast clean as clause 315. • Primer: Zinc phosphate, as recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer. - Manufacturer: International Paint Ltd. Product reference: Intercure 200. - Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer. • Intumescent coat: - Manufacturer: International Paints Ltd. Product reference: Interchar 963. - Finish: Concealed areas: Basic, as clause 440 and Visible areas: Normal decorative, as clause 450. • Top sealer coat: - Dry film thickness: 40 micrometres nominal - two coats required for external exposed steelwork. - Colour: to Architects specification. • Bolt head/ nut protection: As main steelwork.

150A OFF SITE COATING TO UNPRIMED STEEL Hollow Section • Use/ Location: All steel frame members below roof structure. • Fire resistance to BS 476-21: 60 minutes. • Preparation: Blast clean as clause 315. • Primer: Zinc phosphate, as recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer. - Manufacturer: International Paint Ltd. Product reference: Intercure 200. - Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer. • Intumescent coat: - Manufacturer: Interenational Paints Ltd. Product reference: Interbond FP2. - Finish: Concealed areas: Basic, as clause 440 and Visible areas: Normal decorative, as clause.

450. • Top sealer coat: - Dry film thickness: 40 micrometres nominal - two coats required for external exposed steelwork. - Colour: to Architects specification.

• Bolt head/ nut protection: As main steelwork .


205 VALIDATION OF MATERIALS • Project specific evaluation of intumescent coating materials: - Standard: To BS 8202-2, clause 4. Test results: Submit on request.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES • Standard: To BS 8202-2. • Give notice: Before commencing surface preparation and coating application. • Quality control: Record project specific procedures for surface preparation and coating

M61


application.

215 WORKING CONDITIONS • General: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during coating application and

drying. • Surfaces to be coated: Clean and dry at time of coating application.

220 APPLICATOR'S PERSONNEL • Operatives: Trained/ experienced in anticorrosive and intumescent coatings. • Evidence of training/ experience: Submit on request.

250 SPRAYED COATING APPLICATION • Spray drift: Minimize. • Masking: Protect designated adjacent surfaces. - Designated surfaces: Fair faced brickwork finished surfaces.

270 INSPECTION • Permit intumescent coating manufacturer to: - Inspect work in progress. - Inspect quality control records. - Take dry film thickness and other measurements. - Take samples of coating products. • Intumescent coating manufacturer's inspection reports: Submit without delay.

280 OFF SITE COATED STEEL • Handling and erection: Use methods and devices designed to minimise damage to intumescent coatings.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES

315 NEW STEEL - BLAST CLEANING • Preparation: Remove oil and grease. • Blast cleaning: - Atmospheric condition: Dry. - Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil. - Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA2½, with an average profile of approximately 75 micrometres. - Abrasive residues and moisture: Remove. • Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

320 EXISTING STEEL - BLAST CLEANING • Preparation: Remove oil and grease. • Blast cleaning: Remove existing coatings. - Atmospheric condition: Dry. - Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil. - Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA2½, with an average profile of approximately 75 micrometres. - Abrasive residues and moisture: Remove. • Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

330 EXISTING STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING • Preparation: Remove oil and grease. • Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade St2. Leave a clean but unpolished dry surface.

M61


• Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

340 EXISTING STEEL - OVERCOATING • Preparation: Remove oil and grease. • Loose or unsound coatings: Remove to a firm edge. • Exposed steel finish: Manually clean to BS EN ISO 8501-1, grade St2. Leave a clean but

unpolished dry surface. • Existing coatings finish: Abrade to give a good key. Leave a clean, dry surface. • Primer: Apply one brush coat to bare steel areas. Remove coating edges that lift as a result of priming, and reprime.

APPLICATION OF COATINGS

410 INTUMESCENT DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT) • Required dft: Determine for every steel member to give specified period of fire resistance. Use intumescent coating manufacturer's current published loading tables.

Special sections and partial fire exposure conditions: Obtain required dft in writing from manufacturer.

• Schedule and drawings: Submit at least two weeks before starting work. - Schedule content: Member sizes, weights/thicknesses, loading conditions, etc. showing, for

each variant, the exposed perimeter/ sectional area (Hp/A) ratio and required dft. - Drawing content: Steelwork drawings marked in colour to show required dft for each member.

420 MEASUREMENT OF INTUMESCENT DFT • Primer dft: Determine average dft (for deduction from total dft after application of intumescent). • Intumescent dft: Determine at: - 500 mm centres along each coated plane of universal sections (8 planes), and rectangular

hollow sections (4 planes). - 125 mm centres along coated circular hollow sections, spread evenly around circumference. • Acceptance standard: - Average intumescent dft: Not less than required dft (exclusive of primer and top sealer). - Local intumescent dft: Not less than 80% of required dft. Areas greater than 100 mm equivalent

diameter with a dft of less than 80% of required dft must be brought up to thickness.

440 BASIC FINISH • Definition: Reasonably smooth and even. Orange peel, other texture, minor runs and similar minor defects are acceptable.

450 NORMAL DECORATIVE FINISH • Definition: Good standard of cosmetic finish generally, when viewed from a distance of 5 m or

more. Minor orange peel or other texture is acceptable.

460 HIGH DECORATIVE FINISH • Definition: High standard of evenness, smoothness and gloss when viewed from a minimum distance of 2 m.

490 TOP SEALER COAT

• Application: To achieve dft recommended by manufacturer and to give an even, solid, opaque appearance, free from runs, sags and other visual defects.

520 COMPLETION OF OFF SITE COATED STEEL • Exposed unprotected areas, including fixings: Following erection of steelwork, apply intumescent coating locally.

M61


• Unscheduled additional connections to erected steelwork: Remove and reinstate intumescent coating locally.

530 RECORDS OF COATED STEEL • On completion of intumescent coating work, submit: - Accurate surface preparation and coating application records. - Fire resistance certificates.

N10



N10




PRODUCTS

160A ADJUSTABLE SHELVING SYSTEM • Location: Store Rooms • Manufacturer : Spur Systems International Ltd., Steel-Lo • Shelving : 300/450/600mm wide x 19mm plywood, s.w lipped. • Shelving support system in steel with white stove enamel finish • Wall uprights, type 9016, 1600mm long, securely fixed to masonry with gauge 8 countersunk screws. • Fix uprights @ 700mm max. ctrs / 450mm min ctrs. Max overhang of shelf ends to be 1/6th of the

overall length of shelf. • Straight standard brackets, type 9003 (270mm deep) for 300mm wide shelves • Straight standard brackets, type 9004 BR (365mm deep) and 9021R (610mm deep)for 450mm

and 600mm shelves respectively. • Heights : tba • Fixing : As manufacturer's instructions. • Shelf decoration: 2cts clear polyurethane (M60/115)

170 BENCHES - CHANGING ROOM • Manufacturer: Continental Sports Ltd, Hill Top Road, Paddock, Huddersfield, West Yorkshire, HD1 4SD. Tel: 01484 542 051. Fax: 01484 539 148. Email: [email protected]. Web: www.contisports.co.uk. - Product reference: Wall to Floor Bench Seat. • Seat/ Back: - Material: White Beech. - Finish/ Colour: Bullnose Edges. Sealed, lacquered and polished. • Frame: - Material: Steel section. - Finish/ Colour: Epoxy coated. Colour: Black • Fixing: To manufacturer's specification. • Fittings/ Other requirements: Coat hooks & Shoe Racks.

193A WHITEBOARDS - NON-INTERACTIVE • Manufacturer: Sundeala Ltd, Middle Mill, Cam, Dursley, GL11 5LQ. Tel: +44 (0)1453 540900. Fax: +44 (0)1453 549085. Web: www.sundeala.co.uk. Email: [email protected]. - Product reference: P3 Magnetic Dry Wipe Board • Size: Refer to drawings. • Music markings: Not required.

195A NOTICEBOARDS • Manufacturer: Sundeala Ltd, Middle Mill, Cam, Dursley, GL11 5LQ. Tel: +44 (0)1453 540900. Fax: +44 (0)1453 549085. Web: www.sundeala.co.uk. Email: [email protected]. - Product reference: Fabric Covered Notice Board • Material: K9 Board with Standard Felt. • Size: Refer to drawings. • Colour: Refer to drawings.

N10


• Profile: Square. • Frame: Aluminium.

240 BLINDS : Vertical blinds to Classrooms • Manufacturer: Silent Gliss Ltd www.silentgliss.co.uk [email protected] T: +44 (0)1843 863571 F: +44 (0)1843 864503 Pyramid Business Park, Poorhole Lane, Broadstairs, CT10 2PT. - Product reference: Silent Gliss 2810 Hand Operated vertical blind system. • Type: To be fixed below suspended ceiling with recess profile. • Material: Fabric. - Finish/ Colour: TBC. • Operation: Manual. • Accessories/ Other requirements: Integral Child safety device.

Blackout roller blinds: - Product reference: Silent Gliss 4830 chain operated roller blind system Side by side linked

system. • Type: To be fixed below suspended ceiling with recess profile. Maximum 6.6m for side by side

linked system. • Material: Fabric (blackout). - Finish/ Colour: TBC. • Operation: Manual. • Accessories/ Other requirements: Integral Child safety device.

357 BACKBOARDS FOR FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT Provide and fix 450x150x19mm thick MDF backboards with pencil rounded edges for fire extinguishers Decoration: to match walls. Plugged and screwed to walls.

Provide where shown by triangular sign _AFFF_DP_ and''CO2'', where shown on Fire Strategy drawings.

400 EDGE PROTECTORS - Manufacturer: Gradus Ltd. Tel. 01625 428 922 - Reference: 160BN High Impact Surface Mount Corner Guard - Size: 52mm 90 degree with PVC-u retainer and top/bottom caps - Length: 1.22m - Location: where shown on finishes plans 4300 - Guards to be fixed to wall corners at top of skirting level. - Colour: TBC. Allow for non stock colour 410 CORNER WALL PROTECTION

Manufacturer: Yeoman Whitehall Estate,Whitehall Road,Leeds, West Yorkshire, LS12 5JB Tel +44 (0) 113 2795854

N10


www.yeomanshield.com [email protected] Corner Protectors - 3mm thick profile Composition: Vinylac Dimensions:38 x 38mm legs 90°angle Colours: to be confirmed Finishes:3.0mm thick stippled

470 DOOR RESTRAINERS To all external doors unless opening against a wall or opening internally - Drawing reference: see drawings. - Manufacturer and reference: Boyco Standard Catch ref. DRSC restrainer incorporating automatic c.p. door catch with rubber buffer. Door and restrainer to be correctly aligned to ensure correct operation. - Size: 1500mm long, let into ground. - Finish: Hot-dip nylon coated pre-galvanised steel, colour, tba. - Installation: As manufacturer's recommendations. Restrainers to be set into ground parallel to door to suit degree of opening required – 90 degrees. Legs of restrainers to be let into ground (max 500mm) and encased in 300x300x300mm concrete bases.

EXECUTION

710 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED BOARDS • Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover maintain conditions to suit specified moisture contents of timber components. • Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter to manufacturer's recommendations.

720 INSTALLATION GENERALLY • General: As Preliminaries section A33. • Fixing and fasteners: As section Z20. • Services: As Engineering Services specification.

760 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING • Application: As section Z22. • Bedding: Sink to top of worktop. • Pointing: Between units and splash backs.

770 TRIMS • Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs. • Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of jointing. • Angle joints: Mitred.

COMPLETION

910 GENERAL • Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth operation. • Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning.

920 APPLIANCES • Test: Ensure that all functions and features work correctly. • Documentation: Submit guarantees, instruction manuals, etc.

N13



N13




PRODUCTS

300 WCS AND CISTERNS TO BOYS AND GIRLS TOILETS AND STAFF TOILETS • WC standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or equivalent approved by relevant

water company. • Type: Back to wall, concealed low level cistern. • Pan: - Standards: To BS EN 33 and BS EN 997. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: CONTOUR BTW S3420. - Material: Glazed fireclay, white. • Seat and cover: - Standard: To BS 1254. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: S4060. - Material: Plastics, colour to match pan. • Pan connector: - Standard: To BS 5627. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: Contractor's choice. - Colour: White. • Cistern: - Standard: Not applicable. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: CONCEALA 2 Ref S361767. - Material: Vitreous china. - Colour and finish: To match pan. • Flushing arrangement: As WC schedule. - Manufacturer: As Pan. Product reference: As WC schedule. - Operating control: Lever handle, chrome plated. - Water supply connection: As WC schedule. - Flush volume: 6 L. • Flush pipe: Not required. - Manufacturer: Not applicable. Product reference: NA. - Material: NA. • Accessories: Concealed support frames.

311A DOCUMENT M PACKAGES ACCESS WC/SH - SHOWER PACKAGE to Access Toilets if required.

• Manufacturer: Armitage Shanks. - Web: www.thebluebook.co.uk. - Email: [email protected]. - Product reference: S6960 Shower room pack with folding shower seat and back support in grey, three grab rails, two hinged rails and a Multi System 450 mm handrail, lever operated thermostatic mixer for concealed supplies, Multi System handset holder, handset and hose, fixed short projection shower head, lever operated diverter and 1200 x 1200 mm shower curtain, with angle rail and clothes hook • Grab rail colour: Blue.

N13


311B DOCUMENT M PACKAGES ACCESS WC/SH - TOILET PACKAGE • Manufacturer: Armitage Shanks. - Web: www.thebluebook.co.uk. - Email: [email protected]. - Product reference: S6955 Doc M close coupled pack with grab rails and hinged arm support with toilet roll holder • Position: Left hand. • Colour: Easy grip blue. • Accessories: S4300 Panekta outlet connector, finned pattern to convert horizontal outlet WCs to S or turned P traps.

331 SINKS BELFAST CLEANERS

• Standard: To BS 1206. • Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. - Product reference: S5811. • Size: 760x 460 x 260MM. • Material: Glazed fireclay, white. • Tap/ Chainstay/ Overflow holes: No tap holes, overflow hole. • Water supply fittings: Wall mounted taps on back plate elbow. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: S8270AA. -Flow rate: 7.2 Litres per minute @ 0.1 bar. • Wastes: Chain and plug. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: Contractor's choice. - Size: To suit waste. - Material: Brass, chrome plated. - Tail: Slotted. • Traps: As schedule. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: S8915. - Size: As schedule. - Material: Plastics, self colour. - Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm. • Accessories: Concealed support frame.

335 WASH BASINS– WALL HUNG • Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. - Product reference: PORTMAN 21 S2157 . • Size: 400mm WIDE. • Material: Glazed fireclay, white. • Tap/ Chainstay/ Overflow holes: One tap hole, centre. • Water supply fittings: Mixer taps. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: NUASTYLE LEVER ACTION REF S7446AA. -Flow rate: 3.5 Litres per minute @ 0.1 bar with aerator. - Operation: Lever handles. • Wastes: Chain and plug. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: As Wash basins schedule. - Size: As Wash basins schedule. - Material: Brass, chrome plated. - Tail: Slotted.

N13


• Traps: Bottle. - Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3. - Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. Product reference: S8900. - Size: As Wash basins schedule. - Material: Plastics, self colour. - Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm. • Accessories: WALL BRACKETS.

340 SEMI-COUNTERTOP HANDBASIN.

• Manufacturer: Armitage Shanks • _Profile_ white vitreous china semi-countertop handbasin, 51cm, ref. S2441, with 1 tap hole, and overflow, complete with ref. S8733AA 1¼_ waste with swivel plug, 80mm slotted tail, backnut and washer. Ref. S9513AA chainstay hole stopper. • Waste: 32mm white plastic. Wastes combine into 50mm waste where more than one basin occurs. • Trap: 1¼_ white plastic resealing trap with 75mm deep seal, ref. S8920 • Sealing: polysulphide white sealant. • Tap 1: Pegler Prestex Basin taps1/2 877-2 (315037) chrome finish, self-closing tap with hot

markings for blended water supply. 341 VANITY UNITS WITH INTEGRAL WASH BASINS

Product: TLS type 2 Vanity units Material: 13mm o/a thick compact grade laminate Type mould: 300 top bed to take drop in basins, inc 300mm postformed drop skirt Sheet Size: Various sheet sizes available Core: 13mm compact grade laminate Face: Finishes T.B.C from the colour selector provided Edge: D moulded for no sharp edges Fixing: By TLS approved methods to achieve correct finish. TLS to work with builder so

they install correctly, inc drawings for approval and site measure. Fittings: To include plinths for floor trades, all required clips and bonded support systems

for the under panels included. Material: Polyrey is manufactured to current BS regulations Supplier: Total Laminate Systems, 11 Nimrod Way, East Dorset Trade Park, Wimborne

Dorset BH21 7SH Contact no: 01202 877600 Contact email [email protected] Contact: Mr Chris Nunn – Commercial Director

436 HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARSTO DOC M PACK • Manufacturer: ARMITAGE SHANKS. - Product reference: ARMITAGE SHANKS. • Material: COATED STEEL. • Finish: AS STANDARD.

438 MIRRORSTO DISABLED WC • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Material: POLISHED GLASS. • Finish: 1000 x 600mm WITH 4 No FIXINGS WITH MIRROR SCREWS AND CAPS.

N13


438A MIRRORSTO WC'S AND TOILETS, SEE SECTION L40 • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Material: POLISHED GLASS. • Finish: 1000 x 600mm WITH 4 No FIXINGS WITH MIRROR SCREWS AND CAPS.

462A TOILET ROLL HOLDERS SEE DRAWINGS • Manufacturer: AMWELL. - Product reference: 0302104. • Material/ finish: SEE SCHEDULE. • Finish: WHITE.

472 WARM AIR HAND DRIERS • Manufacturer: AIRSTREAM. - Product reference: AIRSTREAM 5000 - tel.no. 0800 838 158 • Electrical supply: REQUIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.

580 SEALANT FOR POINTING • Standard: BS EN ISO 11600. - Class: F20 HN. • Type: HIGH MODULUS SILICONE. - Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Colour: CLEAR - WHITE.

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY • Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended. • Fasteners: Nonferrous or stainless steel. • Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances. • Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework. • Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of appliances, accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded. • Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances. • On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks. • Labels and stickers: Remove.

613 COMPATIBILITY OF COMPONENTS • General: Each sanitary assembly must consist of functionally compatible components, preferably

obtained from a single manufacturer. - Exceptions: Water supply fittings, wastes and traps.

620 NOGGINGS AND BEARERS • Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position accurately. Fix

securely.

630 TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS • Timing: Complete before fixing appliances. • Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles.

650 INSTALLING WC PANS • Floor mounted pans: Screw fix and fit cover caps over screw heads. Do not use mortar or other

beddings.

N13


• Seat and cover: Stable when raised.

670 INSTALLING CISTERNS • Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer. - Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply. • Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge. - Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.

710 INSTALLING TAPS • Fixing: Secure against twisting. • Seal with appliance: Watertight. • Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.

720 INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS • Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound. • Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.

755 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING • Bedding: Bed and point basins to underside of vanity units. . • Pointing: Joints between appliances and splashbacks.

N14


N14 General internal signage systems

N14


N14 General internal signage systems


GENERAL

110 SIGNAGE SYSTEM - MODULAR DOOR DESIGNATION • Location: perspex door signs and direction/map signs (approximate 500x500mm) - System manufacturer: Submit proposals. - Product reference: Submit proposals. - Language: English. • Supports/ Fixings: Door and wall mounted, screw fixed. • Other: Braille to be included

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • Signage system: Complete to BS 559, including facing information, components, inserts,

accessories and fixings necessary to complete the system. - Comply with the requirements of: Fire strategy report. • Geometric shapes, colours and layout: In accordance with BS 8501. • Design standard for disabled people: In accordance with BS 8300. • Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and manufacturer's literature.

240 FIRE REACTION OF SIGNAGE SYSTEM • Non flammable surface: - Standard: Class 1 to BS 476-7.

280 DESIGN LIFEOF SIGNAGE SYSTEM • Duration: 10 years. - Subject to reasonable wear and tear. • Condition of use: Subject to regular maintenance.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCTS GENERALLY • Standard: To BS 559.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY • Installation: To BS 559. - Secure, plumb and level. • Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support all live and dead loads. • Fasteners and or adhesives: As section Z20. • Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being displayed.

620 FIXING SIGNS FOR THE VISUALLY IMPAIRED • Protection of users:

N14


- Fasteners for tactile/ Braille signs must not have sharp edges or protrusions that would cause confusion or injury to users.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION • Submit: - Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. - Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.

N15



N15




GENERAL

110 FIRE SIGNAGE SYSTEMS FOR ESCAPE ROUTE • System manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Layout and dimensions: As drawings 4219-4221 inclusive. - Language: English • Sign type: as schedule on drawings. - Manufacturing process: Manufacturer's standard. • Supports/ Fixings: Wall mounted, screw or adhesive fixed. • Accessories: Not required.

120 SAFETY SIGNAGE SYSTEMS- HAZARD • System manufacturer: UNILINE SAFETY SYSTEMS 3 Sherwood Road, Aston Fields Industrial Estate, Bromsgrove, Worcestershire, B60 3DU. - Product reference: SEE ROOF PLAN. • Layout and dimensions: As drawing. - Language: English • Sign type: Plastics sheet. - Manufacturing process: Manufacturer's standard. • Supports/ Fixings: Wall projected. • Accessories: Not required.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • Signage system design: - Complete to: BS 559 and BS ISO 16069. - Comply with the requirements of: FIRE STRATERGY REPORT. • Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and manufacturer's literature.

240 SIGNAGE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION • Content: Signs including facing information, components, inserts, accessories and fixings

necessary to complete the system. • Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 5499-1. - Font: Helvetica medium. • Escape route: In accordance with BS 5499-4 and BS ISO 16069 • Safety meaning: In accordance with BS 5499-5. • Water safety: In accordance with BS 5499-11.

280 DESIGN LIFE OF FIRE SIGNAGE SYSTEM • Duration: 10 years. - Subject to reasonable wear and tear. • Environment: Internal. • Condition of use: Subject to regular maintenance.

N15


PRODUCTS

305 SIGNAGE PRODUCTS GENERALLY • Standard: To BS 559. • Colorimetric and photometric properties: To BS 5378-2.

310 ADHESIVE VINYL SHEET FOR ESCAPE ROUTE SIGNS • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice . • Component thickness: 2 mm . • Finish: Matt .

330 PLASTICS SHEET FOR ESCAPE ROUTE SIGNS • Material: Acrylic. • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice . • Component thickness: 2 mm . • Finish: Manufacturer's standard . • Perimeters: Manufacturer's standard .

400 PHOTOLUMINESCENT SIGNS • Standard: In accordance with Photoluminescent Safety Products Association (PSPA) Standard 002 part 1. • PSPA material: Class I . • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice . • Base material: Plastics sheet . • Component thickness: 2 mm . • Finish: Manufacturer's standard . • Perimeters: Not required .

EXECUTION

610 FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY • Installation: To BS 559. - Secure, plumb and level. • Fasteners and adhesives: As section Z20. • Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support live and dead loads. • Fasteners for external signs: Corrosion resistant material or with a corrosion resistant finish. Isolate dissimilar metals to avoid electrolytic corrosion. • Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being displayed.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION • Submit: - Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. - Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and logbooks.

920 SPARES • Supply as follows: - Type: ESCAPE ROUTES AND INSTRUCTIONS . - Quantity: 2 sets.

N17


N17

Portable fire fighting systems

N17


N17 Portable fire fighting systems


GENERAL

110 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON FIRE STRATEGY DRAWINGS. • Type: AS SHOWN. - Capacity: AS SHOWN. - Supports: AS SHOWN.

150 FIRE BLANKET SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON FIRE STRATEGY DRAWINGS. • Type: AS SHOWN. • Size: AS SHOWN. • Supports: Mounting brackets.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

220 COLOUR CODING • Portable fire extinguishers: Colour code in accordance with BS 7863.

PRODUCTS

310 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHERS • Standard: To BS EN 3-6. • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED. - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

320 DRY POWDER EXTINGUISHERS • Standard: To BS EN 3-6. • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

330 FOAM EXTINGUISHERS • Standard: To BS EN 3-6. • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED. - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

340 WATER EXTINGUISHERS • Standard: To BS EN 3-6. • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED. - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

420 FIRE BLANKETS - HEAVY DUTY • Standard: To BS 7944. - Type: 1. • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED. - Product reference: Submit proposals.

N17


450 FIRE BUCKETS • Manufacturer: CHUBB OR APPROVED. - Product reference: Submit proposals. • Sand: Clean.

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLING PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS • Mounting height above finished floor level: Bracket fixed at 1.5 m.

650 INSTALLING FIRE BLANKETS • Mounting height above finished floor level: Submit proposals.

670 INSTALLING FIRE BUCKETS • Mounting height above finished floor level: Not applicable. • Contents: Fill bucket with clean sand.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING • Protective wrappings: Remove. • Cleaning: Clean off and wipe down container finishes.

920 TESTING • Test standard: To BS 5603-0. • Test times: At completion. • Notice for testing (minimum): 3 days.

930 TRAININGj • Training: Submit instruction manuals or supply other appropriate resources to train the users of the building in the safe and appropriate use of the fire extinguishers and fire blankets. • Fire brigade: Submit contact details.

940 MAINTENANCE • Servicing: Arrange the first annual service of the portable fire fighting systems. • Maintenance standard: To BS 5603-0.

N25


N25

Permanent access and safety equipment

N25


N25 Permanent access and safety equipment


TYPES OF SYSTEM/ EQUIPMENT 210 FOLDING COLLECTIVE PROTECTION SYSTEM - COLLAPSIBLE BARRIER Standards: To EN 13374 & 14122

• Manufacturer: Kee Safety Ltd. Cradley Business Park, Overend Road Cradley Heath, West Midlands B64 7DW Tel: +44 (0) 1384 632 188

• Product reference: Standard KeeGuard® Foldshield. • Overall system length: Refer Roof Plan drawings. • Type: Recycled PVC Counter Weight System • Vertical Support legs: Folding • Rails: Guardrail Top/ Intermediate • Height of guardrail is set at 1100mm. • Finish: As per manufacturer’s system • Accessories: Connector to latch fall arrest system from ladder to rail system. 211 LADDER RESTRAINT SYSTEM, Refer Roof Plan drawings.

Standard: To BS EN 795. • Manufacturer: Elite Safety Systems.

System reference: Ladder Restraint Kit as shown on the drawing. • Anchorage device: Horizontal stainless steel cable. • Overall system length: see drawing. • Intermediate support spacing: see drawing. • Accessories/ Other requirements: see drawing.

• Installation: To BS 7883 by the system manufacturer or a contractor approved by the system manufacturer.

• Structural anchors: Type recommended by the system manufacturer to suit the structure/ fabric into which they will be fixed.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

420 WIND LOADING • General: Design the access/ safety system to withstand specified wind loads with equipment in position of maximum exposure and in parked position. • Wind loads: Appropriate for Site Location in March, Cambridgeshire.

430 SAFETY • General: The equipment as installed must have no irregularities/ projections capable of inflicting

personal injury. • Finished surfaces and edges of all accessible parts: Regular and smooth.

440 DESIGN LIFE/ MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME • Design life of access/ safety system: Not less than 20 years. • Schedule for maintenance and for replacement of components: Submit.

450 TESTING OF PERMANENT SUSPENDED ACCESS EQUIPMENT • Pre-installation testing: Test roof rig at manufacturer's/ supplier's works. The rig must be capable

N25


of lifting and sustaining a proof load of 125% of the specified rated load without suffering damage or permanent deformation. • Post-installation testing: Immediately on completion of installation, or when otherwise

agreed, examine and test the complete installation in accordance with recommendations given in BS 6037-1, clause 14. Give adequate notice of testing arrangements.

• Certificates for works and site testing: Submit within 7 days of completion of satisfactory acceptance tests.

460 ASSESSMENT/ TESTING OF FIXING POINTS FOR ANCHOR DEVICES • Design and installation of fixings in steelwork or timber: Verified by calculation to be

capable of sustaining the relevant static and dynamic test forces specified in BS EN 795, clause 4.3.

• Fixings in other materials: Verify suitability by carrying out a test in a sample of the material. The sample must be capable of sustaining the relevant static and dynamic test forces specified in BS EN 795, clause 4.3. Thereafter, each structural anchor installed in that material must be subjected to an axial pull out force of 5 kN to confirm the soundness of the fixing. The structural anchor must sustain the force for a minimum of 15 seconds.

FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

510 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY GENERALLY • Machine cutting, drilling and assembly: Carry out as much as possible in the workshop. Obtain approval for any reassembly on site. • Dissimilar metal surfaces of assembly components/ supports/ fixings: Isolate to prevent

electrolytic corrosion.

520 PROTECTION • General: Do not deliver to site any components or assemblies that cannot be installed

immediately or unloaded into a suitable well protected storage area.

530 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE/ FABRIC • Visual and geometric survey of supporting structure and fabric: Carry out before commencing installation of access/ safety system. Report immediately if structure/ fabric will not

allow required accuracy/ security of erection/ fixing.

535 EXECUTION GENERALLY • Structural members: Do not modify, cut notch or make holes in structural members without

permission. • Frameworks: Assemble and brace, including temporary members required for installation. - Temporary support: Do not use access systems as temporary support or strutting for other

work. • Bolted joints: - Contact between dissimilar metals: Avoid. - Bolts and washers: Select types, sizes and quantities of fasteners or packings and spacings to

retain supported components without distortion or loss of support. • Welded joints: Comply with latest edition of National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS),

Section 5. • Finished components: Smooth, free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.

540 MECHANICAL FIXINGS • Materials: Unless otherwise recommended by equipment manufacturer: - Connecting bolts and other fixings fully accessible for inspection: Mild steel hot dip galvanized to BS 7371-6.

N25


Nuts: Tapped after galvanizing. - Cast-in anchors and other fixings not accessible for routine inspection: Austenitic stainless steel, grade 1.4401 (316) to BS EN 10088-1.

550 FASTENERS, INSERTS AND BOLTS FOR BUILDING IN • Supplier: Equipment manufacturer/ supplier.

560 FIXINGS FOR SECURING EQUIPMENT • Adjustment capability: Adequate three dimensional adjustment to accommodate building

structure/ fabric irregularities.

570 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION • Site drilling or cutting into structure/ fabric: Permitted only in approved locations. • Distance between all fixing devices and edges of supporting material: Not less than recommended by fixing manufacturer.

605 IDENTIFICATION AND REGISTRATION LABELS FOR SUSPENDED ACCESS SYSTEM • Provision: - Suspension rig and any non-dedicated track systems: Provide and fix a permanent label giving: a) Manufacturer's name, address and telephone number. b) Name and/ or reference code of model. c) Serial number and year of manufacture.

d) Rated load of suspended platform (where the platform is permanently attached to the system) or maximum total suspended load (where the platform can be derigged).

- Suspended platform: As a), b) and c) above, plus d) Rated load and self weight in kg of the platform. e) Maximum number of persons allowed on the platform.

f) Identification mark or number of the suspension rig or rigs with which the platform is compatible (where the platform can be derigged).

- Suspension and safety ropes (detachable): Marked with length and unique identification number. • Location: In positions such that labels can be easily read.

640 MARKING OF ANCHOR DEVICES • Provision: Provide on or near each anchor device a label or other clear marking giving: - Manufacturer's name and telephone number. - Serial number and year of manufacture of device. - Maximum number of personnel that may be attached to the device at any one time. - Requirements for energy absorbers, ground clearance, etc. • Anchor devices intended solely for use with personal protective equipment: Indicate restriction of use by pictogram or other suitable marking on or near the device.

810 SERVICE/ MAINTENANCEFOR MANSAFE SYSTEM • General: Following acceptance of the completed installation, service and maintain the equipment

for the period stated below as and at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Such maintenance to include a 'call-out' service during normal working hours to maintain the equipment in an acceptable and safe condition. • Service/ Maintenance period: 12 months.

820 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS • Equipment and accessories: Where appropriate, mark in such a way that it is possible to identify

the correct mode of operation for their safe use.

N25


830 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL • General: Provide, for inclusion in the Building Manual, printed instructions and

recommended procedures to be established by the Employer for operating and routinely maintaining the equipment. Provide diagrams where appropriate.

• Content: - Instructions for assembling/ erecting equipment for use. - Comprehensive operating instructions, including safety and emergency procedures, for all

motions including upward, downward and lateral travel, and slew. - Servicing and planned maintenance procedures, including assembly instructions where maintenance necessitates dismantling of machinery parts. - List of replacement parts, with references. - Recommended procedures for testing equipment.

840 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS • General: After commissioning/ testing of the equipment provide as installed drawings for

inclusion in the Building Manual. - Number of sets: 2. • Drawing content: - Contractor's name and contract number. - Location and date of installation. - Manufacturer's name, model and type numbers. - General arrangement of the complete installation. - Electrical circuit wiring diagrams complete with details and ratings of all items of equipment.

P10



P10



SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK


TYPES OF INSULATION

120 UNDER SCREED INSULATION

• Manufacturer: Pittsburgh Corning (UK) Ltd. 31-35 Kirby Street, Hatton Garden London, EC1N 8TE Phone +44 (0)20 7492 1731, [email protected], www.foamglas.co.uk

- Product reference: FOAMGLAS® FLOOR BOARD T4+

• Thickness : 75mm and 100mm. Refer Detail drawings.

• Insulation to be applied in full accordance with Foamglas instructions. • A layer of 1000g polythene to be laid on top of insulation to prevent wet screed penetrating

LOOSE LAID POLYETHYLENE DAMP PROOFING

• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tredegar, NP22 5PY. Tel: 01685 804672. Fax: 01685 842580. - Product reference: Visqueen PIFA Damp Proof Membranes). - Thickness/ Gauge: Thickness/ Gauge: 250mu (1000g).

• Joints: -Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint. -Laps (minimum): End and side, 200 mm. -Sealing: Continuous mastic strip between overlaps; edge of top sheet sealed with jointing tape.

130 EDGE/ CAVITY INSULATION BETWEEN BRICKWORK AND SLAB EDGE OR BLOCKWORK BELOW DPC • Standard: To BS EN 826 CS250 . • Material: Stonewool • Manufacturer: ROCKWOOL UK. ROCKWOOL Limited, Wern Tarw, Bridgend, CF35 6NY or equivalent. - Product reference: Rockfloor • Thickness: 40mm and 100mm as per on KWS drawings or thickness as noted on KWS drawings. • Installation requirements: - Joints: Butted, no gaps. - Fasteners: Used where necessary to retain insulation and/ or prevent slumping. - Air space above insulation: Not restricted.

172 SLAB FIRE BARRIERS: SERVICE HOLES

• Manufacturer and reference: Rockwool Ltd “Fire Barrier Slab”

• Location: All service holes above ceiling level that pass through walls which form 30min / 60min FR compartments. See drawings

• Thickness: 100mm

• Fire Resistance: 1½ hour integrity; 1 hour insulation • Install slabs in full accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by friction fitting between

walls and floor/roof soffits. Acoustic Intumescent sealant to be applied to perimeter of barrier all round and to both sides.

• Pipes up to 35mm external dia. and cable trays up to 305x50mm can penetrate the slab without further treatment other than applying Acoustic Intumescent sealant to form a tight bond where the penetration passes through the slab. For pipes bigger than 35mm,

P10


Insulated Fire Sleeves are to be incorporated. See P10/173. For cable trays bigger than 305x50mm, Multi-cable Firestops are to be incorporated. See P10/174.

• Pipes and cable trays are to be independently supported a max of 150mm from both sides of the slab.

• See technical details

173 FIRE SLEEVES (for pipes bigger than 35mm dia)

• Manufacturer and reference: Rockwool Ltd “Insulated Fire Sleeves” • Location: GF ceiling voids in corporation with “Fire Barrier Slabs”. See P10/172.

• Install slabs in full accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Neatly form holes in fire slab and install fire sleeves around 42mm o/s dia. pipes to protrude 100mm either side of slab. All joints to be taped with self adhesive foil tape, including the joints where the insulated fire sleeve butts to fire slabs.


174 FIRE STOPS FOR CABLE TRAYS

• Manufacturer and reference: Rockwool Ltd “Multi-Cable Firestop” • Location: GF ceiling voids in corporation with “Fire Barrier Slabs”. See P10/172.

• Install slabs in full accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Cut 60x25mm strips to suit width of cable tray. Lay across the cables with the strips 60mm wide and then apply in layers to completely fill the cable tray.


210 INSULATION FITTED TO EXTERNAL FACE OF SFS STUDS/ 12mm CEMENTITIOUS BOARD

• Manufacturer: ROCKWOOL Ltd Web: www.rockwool.co.uk Email: [email protected] Tel: +44 (0)1656 862621 Address: ROCKWOOL Ltd, 14th Floor, Chiswick Tower, 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4

4AJ • Product reference: Rainscreen Duo-Slab • Thickness: 50 mm or 75 mm as per drawings.

211 INSULATION FITTED INSIDE SFS / TIMBER STUDS TO INNER LEAF OF EXTERNAL WALL • Material: Mineral Flexi . • Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY, UK. Tel: 01656 862621 or

equivalent . - Product reference: Rockwool Flexi . • Thickness: 140mm or as required for insulating cavities where referred to on KWS drawings. • Installation requirements: - Joints: Butted, no gaps. - Fasteners: Used to prevent slumping/ displacement.

212 INSULATION FITTED ON THE OUTERFACE OF STEEL COLUMNS or AS REFERRED TO ON DRAWINGS

• Material: A double layer of polyethylene bubble sheet laminated on both sides with specially coated aluminium foil.

• Manufacturer: Thermal Economics Ltd, Thermal House, 8 Cardiff Road, Luton, Bedfordshire LU1 1PP or equivalent.

- Product reference: Alreflex 2L2 FR. • Thickness: 6mm or as required for stopping cold bridging and insulating where referred to on

KWS drawings. - Joints: Butted, no gaps. - Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer.

P10


310 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER FIXED TO BACK FACE OF PLASTERBOARD IN EXTERNAL WALL CONSTRUCTION, U/S OF TIMBER JOISTS/ ROOFLIGHT FRAMING

• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tredegar, NP22 5PY. - Product reference: Visqueen High Performance (HP) Vapour Barrier • Minimum vapour resistance: 1100 MNs/g • Installation requirements: - Setting out: Joints minimized. - Method of fixing: Double sided sealant tape to metal framing. - Joints: At supports only, lapped 150 mm minimum. - Openings: Membrane fixed to reveals. - Joints and edges: Sealed with double sided tape of vapour resistivity not less than the vapour

control layer. - Substrates: Primed as necessary. - Penetrations: Sealed.

315 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER FIXED BETWEEN SFS STUDS AND PLYWOOD LINING • Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tredegar, NP22 5PY. - Product reference: Visqueen High Performance (HP) Vapour Barrier • Minimum vapour resistance: 1100 MNs/g • Installation requirements: - Setting out: Joints minimized. - Method of fixing: Double sided sealant tape to metal framing. - Joints: At supports only, lapped 150 mm minimum. j - Openings: Membrane fixed to reveals. - Joints and edges: Sealed with double sided tape of vapour resistivity not less than the vapour

control layer. - Substrates: Primed as necessary. - Penetrations: Sealed.

316 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER ON TOP OF INSULATION

A layer of 1000g polythene to be laid on top of insulation to prevent wet screed penetrating • Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney, Tredegar, NP22 5PY. Tel: 01685 804672. Fax: 01685 842580. -Product reference: Visqueen PIFA Damp Proof Membranes). • Thickness/ Gauge: Thickness/ Gauge: 250mu (1000g). • Joints: -Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint. -Laps (minimum): End and side, 200 mm. -Sealing: Continuous mastic strip between overlaps; edge of top sheet sealed with jointing tape.

320 BREATHER MEMBRANE • Material: To BS 4016, Type 3. • Manufacturer: DUPONT. - Product reference: TYVEK SUPRO PLUS. • Installation requirements: - Setting out: Joints minimized. Membrane to form a continuous barrier to prevent water, snow and wind blown dust reaching the substrate. - Method of fixing: Galvanized large head nails at 300 mm centres into timber studs.

P10


- Joints: Lapped 100 mm minimum horizontally and 150 mm minimum vertically. - Openings: Membrane fixed to reveals. - Bottom edges: Membrane lapped over flashings, sills, etc. to allow free drainage to the exterior. • Penetrations: Sealed.

410 FLEXIBLE CAVITY BARRIERS pistol • Manufacturer: ROCKWOOL. - Product reference: FIRESTOP. • Material: Wired glass wool batts. • Fire resistance rating: To BS 476-20, 30/15 integrity/ insulation. • Installation requirements: - Spacing: Installed in voids so the maximum unobstructed dimension in any direction is 20 m. - Fixing: Secure at perimeters and joints with no gaps, to provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

P12



P12




GENERAL

130 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS - • Joint filler: Intumescent foams, FILLERS OR COLLARS. - Size or thickness: 50 mm MIN. - Pipe outside diameter: Varies. • Sealant: Contractor's choice . - Colour: Contractor's choice .

140 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO MULTIPLE SERVICES PENETRATIONS TO FIRE SEPERATING FLOORS • Panel material: Contractor's choice . - Thickness: 50 mm. - Number of layers: One. - Framing: as required. • Finish: Intumescent mortars. • Sealant: Contractor's choice . - Colour: Contractor's choice .

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN • Design: Complete the design of the fire stopping system. • Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.

240 FIRE RESISTANCE OF COMPARTMENT FLOORS • Fire resistance: - Rating to BS 476-20: 60/60. - Rating to BS EN 13501-2: EI 60. • Surface spread of flame to BS 476-7: Class 0. • Smoke resistance: - Air leakage rate (maximum): 3 m³/m²·hr.

PRODUCTS

310 BOARDS - CALCIUM SILICATE FIBRE REINFORCED • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

315 BOARDS - CALCIUM SILICATE FILLED AND FIBRE REINFORCED • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

320 BOARDS - EXFOLIATED VERMICULITE • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

325 BOARDS - MINERAL BOUND LIGHTWEIGHT

P12


• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

330 FIRE STOP LAMINATES • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

335 INTUMESCENT FOAMS • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

340 INTUMESCENT MORTARS • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

350 INTUMESCENT PUTTIES • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

360 MINERAL WOOL RIGID BATTS • Standard: To BS 3958-5. • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

370 PIPE COLLARS - CONCEALED INTUMESCENT • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

385 SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice . - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

390 SEALANTS - FIRE RESISTING SILICONE • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice .

EXECUTION

620 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY • Gaps: Seal gaps between building elements and services, to provide fire resistance and resist the passage of smoke. • Adjacent surfaces: Prevent overrun of sealant or mortar on to finished surfaces.

640 INSTALLING BOARDING • Position of boarding: Within opening. • Framing: Provide trimming around openings. • Bedding: Bed boarding on fire resisting silicone. • Double layers of board: Staggered butt joints. - Joints: Seal with board adhesive. • Fixing: Submit proposals.

P12


660 INSTALLING INTUMESCENT FOAM • New joints: Remove builder's debris, mortar droppings, grease, and the like. • Old joints: Clean and remove existing sealant from the joint. • Priming: Lightly moisten substrate with water. • Application: Fill joint to approximately half its depth, allowing foam to expand to face of joint. • Trimming: Do not trim or cut the face of the cured foam.

670 APPLYING INTUMESCENT MORTAR • Sequence: Install mortar after services are permanently installed. • Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening. • Shuttering: Install suitable shuttering panels to the faces of the opening. • Temperature: Do not apply mortar when it could be damaged by frost. • Powder: water ratio: 2:1 for trowel grade by volume. • Mortar cure: Do not disturb mortar before final set has taken place. • Shuttering: Remove after mortar has cured.

690 APPLYING INTUMESCENT PUTTY • Sequence: Install putty after services are permanently installed. • Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.

710 INSTALLING BATTS • Installing batts: Fit tight into void between the floor or wall and the penetrating services. • Face of batts: Flush with the surface of wall, floor or soffit. • Joints: Closed butt joints.. • Gaps between services and bulkhead: Seal with fire resisting sealant.

730 FIXING PIPE COLLARS • Collar fixing: Adhesive . • Gap around collar: Seal with intumescent foam. • Length of wraps: Project 50 mm from each side of the element.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING • Masking tapes: Remove. • Cleaning: Clean off splashes and droppings. Wipe down finishes.

P20



P20



To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions

120A HARDWOOD: SKIRTING • Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3. • Species: Hardwood • Class: J30 as classified in BS EN 942. • Moisture content at time of fixing:14 to 18 % • Profile: pencil rounded front edge • Finished size: 19 x 150mm • Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelletted to masonry • Finish: Stain and clear varnish • Special requirements: Apply clear silicon seal where timber skirtings abut vinyl flooring. • Skirtings in FF rooms are to be fixed 3mm above the screed to help avoid sound transmittance between floors.

121 HARDWOOD ARCHITRAVES • Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3. • Species: hardwood • Class: J30 as classified in BS EN 942. • Moisture content at time of fixing: 14 to 18 % • Profile: pencil rounded front edge • Finished size: 18x55mm. • Fixing: pinned and glued. • Finish: Stain, holes to be filled with colour to match stain and clear varnish.

122 HARDWOOD DOOR STOPS • Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3. • Species: hardwood • Class: J30 as classified in BS EN 942. • Moisture content at time of fixing: 14 to 18 % • Profile: Pencil rounded arrisses. • Finished size: 18x55 mm • Fixing: pinned • Finish: Stain, holes to be filled with colour to match stain and clear varnish.

200 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD - WINDOW SILL BOARDS • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Standard: To BS EN 622-5. - Type: MDF.H. - Formaldehyde class: To BS EN 622-1, Class E1. • Fire rating: Not applicable. • Thickness: 25 mm. Edges: Bullnose profile to front edge. • Finish: Prepared and primed as section M60 • Gloss paint finish. . • Seal between window board and window/plaster reveal with clear silicone sealant. • Recycled content: 60% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021. • Support/ Fixing: Fix to metal studs with lost head nails at 600 mm centres.

P20


350A PINBOARDS • Manufacturer and reference: Sundeala 'K' see finishes drawings 4220 • Thickness: 9mm • Size(s): 1200X1200 or 1200 x 2400 mm. • Edge treatment: chamfered edges in classrooms • Fixing: plugged, brass cupped and screwed to walls at 300mm ctrs.

400 TRIM TO LIGHT WELLS, BULKHEADS, ETC • Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3. • Species: Western Hemlock • Class: J30 as classified in BS EN 942 • Moisture content at time of fixing: 14 to 18 % • Profile: Pencil rounded arrisses and 5x5mm rebate. • Finished size: 112 x 32mm • Fixing: pinned

EXECUTION

510 INSTALLATION GENERALLY • Joinery workmanship: As section Z10. • Metal workmanship: As section Z11. • Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified. • Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible. • Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed. • Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.

P21



P21




QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS

100 • Quantities and locations of ironmongery are in the ironmongery schedule reference: TBC

• Fixing: As sections L10 and L20.

GENERAL

120A IRONMONGERY RANGE BY JOHN PLANCK LTD Provide and fix ironmongery as specified on ironmongery schedule, ref. TBC.

P30


P30

Trenches, pipeways and pits for buried engineering services

P30


P30 Trenches, pipeways and pits for buried engineering services


GENERALLY

110 ROUTES OF SERVICES BELOW GROUND Agree precise locations of service runs and pipe ducts with the CA. Set out clearly and accurately. Locate service runs and pipe ducts with temporary marker posts of 75 mm x 75 mm softwood painted white and projecting not less than 600 mm above ground level.

PRODUCTS

320A PIPEDUCTS For service entries Type(s) and size(s) recommended for the purpose by the service undertaker.

480A WARNING MARKER TAPES WITH METAL STRIP During backfilling, lay continuous colour coded, heavy gauge polyethylene identification tapes along the route of all service mains

Location, depth, colour and markings to the requirements of the service undertaker.

EXECUTION

625 TRENCHES • Trench width: As small as practicable. • Trench sides: Contractor's choice. • Trench bottoms: Remove mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots. Trim level. • Give notice: To inspect trench for each section of the work.

640A LAYING PIPEDUCTS • Lay pipes straight to line, true to gradient or level on an even, continuous 50 mm bed of the

specified bedding material, laid over full width of trench. Provide 50 mm minimum clearance between pipe ducts where they cross.

• Where drawlines are required by the service installer, thread through each pipe during laying. Material, strength and length of drawline to be as specified by the service installer.

• Protect from damage and ingress of debris; temporarily seal all exposed ends during construction. • Give service undertakers or subcontractors reasonable opportunity to inspect installation prior to backfilling. • Lay and compact further bedding material to a level not less than 150 mm above crown of pipe.

647 BEDDING FOR PIPEDUCTS Selected fill, free from vegetable matter, rubbish, frozen soil and excluding lumps and stones retained on a 40 mm sieve. Thoroughly compact by hand in layers not exceeding150 mm.

647A BEDDING FOR PIPEDUCTS Single size 10 mm aggregate to BS 882. Lay and compact uniformly in 100 mm layers.

675 BACKFILLING GENERALLY • Backfill from top of pipeduct surround: Material excavated from the trench.

P30


• Backfilling: Lay and compact in 300 mm maximum layers. Do not use heavy compactors before backfill is 600 mm deep.

680 BACKFILLING UNDER ROADS AND PAVINGS • Backfill from top of pipeduct surround: As section D20. • Backfilling: Lay and compact in 150 mm maximum layers.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION • Inspection of pipeducts: Before backfilling. Inspection by: CA.

930 DOCUMENTATION • Record drawings: Submit.

P31


P31

Holes, chases, covers and supports for services

P31


P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports for services


EXECUTION

610 COORDINATION • Locations and dimensions of holes and chases for services: Submit details to CA for checking before proceeding with the work

620 HOLES AND CHASES IN IN SITU CONCRETE • Cast in: Holes larger than 10 mm diameter and chases. • Cutting and drilling: - Permitted for holes not larger than 10 mm diameter. Not permitted for holes larger than 10 mm diameter except as indicated on drawings.

630 HOLES AND CHASES IN PRECAST CONCRETE • Cutting and drilling: Not permitted except as indicated on drawings.

640 HOLES IN STRUCTURAL STEELWORK • Cutting and drilling: Not permitted except as indicated on drawings.

650 HOLES, RECESSES AND CHASES IN MASONRY • Locations: To maintain integrity of strength, stability and sound resistance of construction. • Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services. - Holes (maximum): 300 x 300 mm. • Walls of hollow or cellular blocks: Do not chase. • Walls of other materials: - Vertical chases: No deeper than one third of single leaf thickness, excluding finishes. - Horizontal or raking chases: No longer than 1 m. No deeper than one sixth of the single leaf

thickness, excluding finishes. • Chases and recesses: Do not set back to back. Offset by a clear distance at least equal to the

wall thickness. • Cutting: Do not cut until mortar is fully set. Cut carefully and neatly. Avoid spalling, cracking and other damage to surrounding structure.

670 NOTCHES AND HOLES IN STRUCTURAL TIMBER • General: Avoid if possible. • Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services. • Position: Do not locate near knots or other defects. • Notches and holes in same joist: Minimum 100 mm apart horizontally. • Notches in joists: Locate at top. Form by sawing down to a drilled hole. - Depth (maximum): 0.125 x joist depth. - Distance from supports: Between 0.07 and 0.25 x span. • Holes in joists: Locate on neutral axis. - Diameter (maximum): 0.25 x joist depth. - Centres (minimum): 3 x diameter of largest hole. - Distance from supports: Between 0.25 and 0.4 of span. • Notches in roof rafters, struts and truss members: Not permitted. • Holes in struts and columns: Locate on neutral axis.

P31


- Diameter (maximum): 0.25 x minimum width of member. - Centres (minimum): 3 x diameter of largest hole. - Distance from ends: Between 0.25 and 0.4 of span

690A PIPE SLEEVES FOR HEATING PIPES Sleeves to extend through full thickness of wall/floor and be accurately positioned to give a minimum clearance around service of 20 mm or diameter of service, whichever is the least.

• Sleeves, whether built in or installed in preformed holes, to be bedded solid. • Seal annular space between service and sleeve • Where exposed to view, finish bedding and sealing neatly to approval.

710A SEALING AROUND SERVICES Seal around all services where they pass through fire resisting walls with intumescent products. Completely fill the space, leaving no gaps and finish neatly.

750 INSTALLATION GENERALLY • In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations, store, prepare and fix boards in accordance with the recommendations of the relevant trade association. • Keep boards dry and do not fix to timber supports having a moisture content greater than 18%. • Ensure that building is weathertight before fixing boards internally. • Set out boards with joints accurately aligned, of constant width and parallel to perimeter edges. • Methods of fixing, and fasteners to be as section Z20 unless specified otherwise. • Protect boards/sheets from dirt, stains and damage until Practical Completion.

760 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS Additional studs, noggins and battens: Provision: In accordance with board manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: Tongue and groove jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported perimeter edges. Butt jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported edges. Size: Not less than 50 mm wide and of adequate thickness. Quality of timber: As for adjacent timber supports. Treatment (where required): As for adjacent timber supports.

R10


R10

Rainwater drainage systems

R10


R10 Rainwater Drainage Systems


GENERAL 110 GRAVITY RAINWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM.

Rainwater outlets: As per detail sections below Gutters: As per detail sections below Pipework: As per detail sections below Accessories outlets: As per detail sections below

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 210 DESIGN

Design:Complete the design of the rainwater drainage system Standard:To BSEN12056-3:2000,clauses 3-7 and National Annexes Proposals: Submit Drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacture's literature.

221 COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF RAINWATER General: Complete, and without leakage or noise nuisance

230 DESIGN PARAMETERS - GENERAL Roof and gutter construction and finish: As per detail sections below Design Rate of rainfall: As per BSEN12056-3:2000, National Annex NB.2 - Category 1 Available capacity of existing below ground drainage (maximum): TBC

PRODUCTS 365 Harmer Roof Outlets

Manufacturer: Alumasc Exterior Building Products Ltd, White House Works, Bold Road, Sutton St Helens, Merseyside WA9 4JG Tel: 01744 648400, Fax: 01744 648401. Email: [email protected] Outlet : Harmer AV Aluminium Type : AV Spigot Outlets Grate Type : Domed Grate Size : 100mm Product Code : AV400 Reference: Harmer Roof Outlets Accessories: Flat grate, domed grate, trafficable grate.

EXECUTION

600 PREPARATION specified in this section, ensure that: Below ground drainage is ready to receive rainwater or that the discharge can be dispersed by approved means to prevent damage or disfigurement of the building fabric. Any specified painting of surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible is completed.

605 INSTALLATION GENERALLY:

R10


� Install pipework/gutters to ensure the complete discharge of rainwater from the building without leaking. � Obtain all components for each type of pipework/guttering from the same manufacturer unless specified otherwise. � Provide access fittings and rodding eyes as necessary in convenient locations to permit adequate cleaning and testing of pipework. � Avoid contact between dissimilar metals and other materials which would result in electrolytic corrosion. � Do not bend plastics or galvanized steel pipes. � Adequately protect pipework/gutters from damage and distortion during construction. Fit purpose made temporary caps to prevent ingress of debris. Fit all access covers, cleaning eyes and

blanking plates as the work proceeds. � Where not specified otherwise use plated, sherardized, galvanized or nonferrous fastenings, suitable for the purpose and background, and compatible with the material being fixed.

610 FIXING AND JOINTING GUTTERS: � Fix securely at specified centres and at all joints in gutters, with additional brackets near angles and outlets. � Provide for thermal and building movement when fixing and jointing, and ensure that clearances are not reduced as fixing proceeds. � Seal as specified to make watertight. � Spread jointing compound evenly over jointing face of socket. � For gutters with bolted joints, tighten joints in the gutter sole before any other bolts. Fit suitable washers, and spacers to prevent overtightening, unless specified otherwise. � Tighten fixing to squeeze out some compound. � Remove surplus, squeezed out compound and neatly clean off. � Ensure that roofing underlay is dressed into gutter.

611 SETTING OUT EAVES GUTTERS – TO FALLS � Set out to a true line and even gradient to ensure no ponding or backfall. Position high points of gutters as close as practical to the roof and low points not more than 50 mm below the roof. � Position outlets to align with connections to below ground drainage, unless shown otherwise on drawings.

630 RAINWATER OUTLETS: Ensure that: � Outlets are securely fixed before connecting pipework. � Junctions between outlets and pipework can accommodate all movement in the structure and pipework.

435 FIXING PIPEWORK: � Fix securely at specified centres plumb and/or true to line. � Make changes in direction of pipe runs only where shown on drawings unless otherwise approved. � Fix branches and low gradient sections with uniform and adequate falls to drain efficiently. � Fix externally socketed pipes/fittings with sockets facing upstream. � Provide additional supports as necessary to support junctions and changes in direction. � Fix every length of pipe at or close below the socket collar or coupling. � Provide a load bearing support for vertical pipes at not less than every storey level. Tighten fixings as the work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting and undue weight is not

imposed on fixings at the base of the pipe. � Isolate from structure where passing through walls or floors and sleeve pipes as specified in Section P31.

R10


� Provide for thermal and building movement when fixing and jointing, and ensure that clearances are not reduced as fixing proceeds. � Fix expansion joint pipe sockets rigidly to the building and elsewhere use fixings that allow the pipe to slide.

650 JOINTING PIPEWORK/GUTTERS: � Joint using materials, fittings and techniques which will make effective and durable connections. � Joint differing pipework/gutter systems with adaptors recommended by manufacturer(s). � Cut ends of pipes to be clean and square with burrs and swarf removed. Chamfer pipe ends before inserting into ring seal sockets. � Ensure that jointing or mating surfaces are clean, and where necessary lubricated, immediately before assembly. � Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose ensuring that jointing material does not project into bore of pipes, fittings and appliances. � Remove surplus flux/solvent/cement/sealant from joints.

675 COATED PIPEWORK/GUTTERS: � Make good to coatings after cutting and any other damage or recoat, as recommended by the manufacturer.

685 IDENTIFICATION OF INTERNAL RAINWATER PIPEWORK: To BS 1710 using self-adhesive bands or identification clips located at junctions, at both sides of each slab, bulkhead and wall penetration, and elsewhere as directed.

690 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY:

� Use clips or suitable standard couplings supplied for the purpose by pipework manufacturer to ensure electrical continuity at all joints in metal pipes with flexible couplings and which are to be

earth bonded.

700 ACCESS FOR TESTING AND MAINTENANCE: � Install pipework and gutters with adequate clearance to permit testing, cleaning and maintenance. � Position access fittings and rodding eyes so that they are not obstructed by other pipework, framing, etc.

COMPLETION

900 TESTING GENERALLY: � Inform CA sufficiently in advance to give him a reasonable opportunity to observe tests. � Check that all sections of installation are free from obstruction and debris before testing. � Provide clean water, assistance and apparatus for testing as required. � Carry out tests as specified. After testing, locate and remedy all defects without delay and retest as instructed. � Keep a record of all tests and provide a copy of each to the CA.

905 INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST – ENGLAND, WALES AND NORTHERN IRELAND: � Temporarily seal open ends of pipework with plugs. � Connect a 'U' tube water gauge and air pump to the pipework via a plug. � Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 38 mm.

R10


� Allow a period for temperature stabilization, after which the pressure of 38 mm is to be maintained without loss for not less than 3 minutes.

906 INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST- SCOTLAND � Standard – To BSEN12056-3:2000, National Annex NG

910 GUTTER TEST: � Block all outlets, fill gutters to overflow level and after 5 minutes closely inspect for leakage.

915 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS � At completion, submit printed instructions recommending procedures for maintenance of the rainwater installation including full details of the recommended inspection, cleaning and repair

procedures.

920 IMMEDIATELY BEFORE HANDOVER: � Remove construction rubbish and debris from all roofs and gutters. Where possible, sweep and remove fine dust which may enter rainwater systems. Do not sweep or flush dust or debris into

the rainwater system. � Remove swarf, debris and temporary caps from the entire rainwater installation. � Ensure that all access covers, rodding eyes, outlet gratings, etc. are secured complete with all fixings.

R11


R11

Above ground foul drainage systems

R11


R11 Above ground foul drainage systems


GENERAL

115 ABOVE GROUND FOUL DRAINAGE SYSTEM • Sanitary and floor drainage outlets: to the three storey building. • Waste pipework:from toilets, whb’s and sinks • Discharge stack and branch pipework: throughout the 3 storey building • Separate ventilating pipework: for extract see Mechanical specification • Accessories: as required to complete the installation. • Disposal: to foul sewer/underground drainage.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN • Design: Complete the design of the above ground foul drainage system. • Standards: To BS EN 12056-1 and BS EN 12056-2, and in accordance with BS EN 12056- 2 National Annexes NA-NG. - System type to BS EN 12056-2: System III. • Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.

220 COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF FOUL WATER • General: Quick, quiet and complete, self-cleansing in normal use, without blockage, crossflow, backfall, leakage, odours, noise nuisance or risk to health. • Pressure fluctuations in pipework (maximum): ±38 mm water gauge. • Water seal retained in traps (minimum): 25 mm.

PRODUCTS

315 FLOOR DRAINS TO BOILER HOUSE IF REQUIRED • Manufacturer: Wade. - Product reference: recessed floor gully. • Floor finish: epoxy floor paint • Body type:. - Material: metal • Grating/ cover: - Material: metal • Outlet: Type and direction to suit pipework. • Accessories: connectors

350 MUPVC OR PVC-C PIPEWORK- WASTES FROM SANITARYWARE • Material and standard: - MUPVC: To BS 5255 and Kitemark certified; or - PVC-C: To BS EN 1566-1, and Kitemark certified. Application area code: B. Opening dimensions of access fittings, design of swept fittings, stand off dimensions of pipe and

fitting brackets and requirements for adaptors and plugs: To BS 4514. • Manufacturer: OSMA • Nominal pipe sizes: 40mm, 50mm and 100mm ID. • Colour: grey where concealed- white where exposed. • Brackets: plastic

R11


- Fixings: deep seal traps, bends and connections • Accessories: to complete the system including rodding points and air admittance valves.

355 VULCATHENE PIPEWORK FROM KITCHEN SINKS • Standard: - To BS 5255 and Kitemark certified; or - To BS EN 1451-1 and Kitemark certified. Application area code: B. Opening dimensions of access fittings, design of swept fittings, stand off dimensions of pipe and fitting brackets and requirements for adaptors and plugs: To BS 4514. • Manufacturer: Osma - Product reference: Vulcathene • Nominal sizes: 40mm • Colour: black • Brackets: @1m crs. - Fixings: screwed to walls • Accessories: deep seal traps suitable for chemistry laboratories

365 PVC-U PIPEWORK FROM WC’s • Standard: To BS EN 1329-1, Kitemark certified. - Weather resistance, connectors to WC pans, opening dimensions of access fittings, design of swept fittings, stand off dimensions of pipe and fitting brackets and requirements for adaptors and plugs: To BS 4514. • Manufacturer: OSMA • Nominal size:100mm • Colour: White where exposed otherwise grey. • Brackets: as required to support pipes. - Fixings: plugged and screwed.

375 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES • Standard: To BS EN 12380 or Agrément certified. • Minimum air flow rate: To BS EN 12056-2. • Manufacturer: Durgo - Product reference: air admittance valves

390 RODDING EYES TO WC BRANCHES and TRUNK WASTES • Manufacturer: Osma • Body material: PVC-u. EXECUTION

601 INSTALLATION GENERALLY • Standard: To BS EN 12056-5. • Components: From the same manufacturer for each type of pipework. • Electrolytic corrosion: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals where corrosion may occur. • Plastics and galvanized steel pipes: Do not bend. • Allowance for thermal and building movement: Provide and maintain clearance as fixing and jointing proceeds. • Concealed or inaccessible surfaces: Decorate before starting work specified in this section. • Protection: - Purpose made temporary caps: Fit to prevent ingress of debris. - Access covers, cleaning eyes and blanking plates: Fit as the work proceeds.

R11


605 PIPE ROUTES • General: The shortest practical, with as few bends as possible. - Bends in wet portion of soil stacks: Not permitted. - Routes not shown on drawings: Submit proposals before commencing work.

610 FIXING PIPEWORK • Pipework: Fix securely plumb and/ or true to line. Fix discharge stack pipes at or close below socket collar or coupling. • Branches and low gradient sections: Fix with uniform and adequate falls to drain efficiently. • Externally socketed pipes and fittings: Fix with sockets facing upstream. • Additional supports: Provide as necessary to support junctions and changes in direction. • Vertical pipes: Provide a load bearing support not less than every storey level. Tighten fixings as work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting. • Wall and floor penetrations: Isolate pipework from structure, e.g. with pipe sleeves. • Expansion joint sockets: Fix rigidly to the building. • Fixings: Allow the pipe to slide.

615 FIXING VERTICAL PIPEWORK- SVP’s • Bracket fixings: fixed to walls/partitions • Distance between bracket fixing centres (maximum): @2m crs

620 FIXING LOW GRADIENT PIPEWORK FROM WC TRUNK WASTES • Bracket fixings: fixed to walls/partitions • Distance between bracket fixing centres (maximum): @1m crs

630 JOINTING PIPEWORK - GENERALLY • General: Joint with materials, fittings and techniques that will make effective and durable connections. • Jointing differing pipework systems: With adaptors intended for the purpose. • Cut ends of pipes: Clean and square. Remove burrs and swarf. Chamfer pipe ends before inserting into ring seal sockets. • Jointing or mating surfaces: Clean and, where necessary, lubricate immediately before assembly. • Junctions: Form with fittings intended for the purpose. • Jointing material: Do not allow it to project into bore of pipes and fittings. • Surplus flux, solvent jointing materials and cement: Remove from joints.

655 JOINTING PIPEWORK - HDPE AND POLYPROPYLENE • Jointing: solvent /welded

660 JOINTING PIPEWORK - ABS, MUPVC, PVC-C AND PVC-U • Jointing: solvent welded.

685 IDENTIFICATION OF INTERNAL FOUL DRAINAGE PIPEWORK • Markings: To BS 1710. - Type: adhesive tape - Wording: FOUL DRAINAGE • Type: Integral lettering on pipe wall, self-adhesive bands or identification clips. • Locations: At 500 mm centres, junctions and both sides of slabs, valves, appliances, bulkheads and wall penetrations.

695 DISCHARGE AND VENTILATING STACKS • Terminations: Perforated cover or cage that does not restrict airflow. - Material: UPVC.

R11


700 INSTALLING AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES • Position: Vertical, above flood level of highest appliance served and clear of insulation materials (other than the manufacturer's insulating cover). • Connection to discharge stack: Allow removal for rodding, e.g. ring seal. • Roof spaces and other unheated locations: Fit manufacturer's insulating cover.

705 ACCESS FOR TESTING AND MAINTENANCE • General: Install pipework with adequate clearance to permit testing, cleaning and maintenance, including painting where necessary. • Access fittings and rodding eyes: Position to avoid obstruction.

COMPLETION

900 TESTING GENERALLY • Dates for testing: Give notice. - Period of notice (minimum): 1 week. • Preparation: - Pipework: Securely fixed and free from obstruction and debris. - Traps: Filled with clean water. • Testing: - Supply clean water, assistance and apparatus. - Do not use smoke to trace leaks. • Records: Submit a record of tests.

905 PIPEWORK AIRTIGHTNESS TEST • Preparation: - Open ends of pipework: Temporarily seal using plugs. - Test apparatus: Connect a 'U' tube water gauge and air pump to pipework via a plug or through trap of an appliance. • Testing: Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 38 mm. • Required performance: Pressure of 38 mm is to be maintained without loss for at least three minutes.

910 SIPHONAGE AND BACK PRESSURE TESTS • Method: - WC pans: Test by flushing. - Other appliances: Test by filling to overflow level, then removing the plug. • Number of tests: Test each appliance three times. Recharge traps before each test. • Self siphonage testing: Test each appliance individually. • Induced siphonage and back pressure testing: Test by discharging the following appliances simultaneously on each stack: - WCs: where connected to trunk wastes - Washbasins: to toilets/labs. - Sinks:in science labs/prep. rooms - Selection of appliances: Submit proposals.

915 PREHANDOVER CHECKS • Temporary caps: Remove. • Permanent blanking caps, access covers, rodding eyes and the like: Secure complete with fixings.

920 SUBMITTALS • Manufacturer's instructions for vulcathene warranted use- chemical resistant pipework. Handover at completion.

Z10


Z10

Purpose made joinery

Z10


Z10 Purpose made joinery


110 FABRICATION • Standard: To BS 1186-2. • Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed out of solid

unless shown otherwise. - Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising and other machining

defects. • Joints: Tight and close fitting. • Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion. • Screws: Provide pilot holes. - Screws of 8 gauge (4 mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood: Provide clearance holes. - Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2 mm below surfaces visible in completed work. • Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of timber.

120 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER • General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes. • Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: - Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1:- Clause 6 for sawn sections. Clause NA.2 for further processed sections. - Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-2:- Clause 6 for sawn sections. Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD • Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment. • Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed, ploughed, etc. • Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat as recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

140 MOISTURE CONTENT • Wood and wood based products: Maintained within range specified for the component during

manufacture and storage.

210 LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS • Fabrication: To British Laminated Plastics Fabricators Association Ltd (BLF) fabricating

standards. • Balancing veneer: From decorative veneer manufacturer and of similar composition. Applied to reverse side of core material. • Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks,

pimpling, indentations, glue marks, staining and variations in colour and pattern. • Joints visible in completed work: Tight butted, true and flush.

220 WOOD VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS • Core material and veneers: Conditioned before bonding. • Setting out: Veneer features and grain pattern aligned regularly and symmetrically unless

instructed otherwise.

Z10


• Balancing veneer: Applied to reverse side of core material. - Moisture and temperature movement characteristics: As facing veneer. • Veneer edges: Tight butted and flush, with no gaps. • Tolerance of veneer thickness (maximum): ± 0.5 mm. • Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, splits, blebs,

indentations, glue marks and staining. • Surface finish: Fine, smooth, free from sanding marks.

250 FINISHING • Surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes. - Arrises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings. • End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as section M60 and allowed to dry before assembly.

Z11


Z11

Purpose made metalwork

Z11


Z11 Purpose made metalwork


310 METAL PRODUCTS • Standards: Generally, as specified in the following clauses. • Fasteners: Generally, same metal as component, with matching coating and finish.

515 FABRICATION GENERALLY • Contact between dissimilar metals in components: Avoid. • Finished components: Rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises. - Moving parts: Free moving without binding. • Corner junctions of identical sections: Mitre. • Prefinished metals: Do not damage or alter appearance of finish.

520 COLD FORMED WORK • Profiles: Accurate, with straight arrises.

535 WELDING/ BRAZING GENERALLY • Surfaces to be joined: Clean thoroughly. • Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment. • Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or cracks. • Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in completed work: Protect from weld spatter. • Flux residue, slag and weld spatter: Remove.

540 WELDING OF STEEL • Method: Metal arc welding to BS EN 1011-1 and -2.

565 FINISHING WELDED AND BRAZED JOINTS VISIBLE IN COMPLETE WORK • Butt joints: Smooth, and flush with adjacent surfaces. • Fillet joints: Neat. • Grinding: Grind smooth where indicated on drawings.

320 STEEL LONG AND FLAT PRODUCTS • Hot rolled structural steels (excluding structural hollow sections and tubes): To BS EN 10025-1. • Fine grain steels, including special steels: To BS EN 10025-3 and -4. • Steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance: To BS EN 10025-5.

330 STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP • Plates and wide flats, high yield strength steel: To BS EN 10025-6.

340 HOT ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP • Flat products, high yield strength for cold forming: To BS EN 10149-1, -2 and -3. • Carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10111. • Narrow strip, formable steel and steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1449-1.8 and BS

1449-1.14.

Z11


350 COLD ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP • Steel sections: To BS EN 10162. • Flat products, high yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold forming: To BS EN 10268. • Carbon steel flat products for cold forming: To BS EN 10130 and BS EN 10131. • Uncoated carbon steel narrow strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10139 and BS EN 10140. • Narrow strip steel for general engineering purposes: To BS EN 10132-1, -2, and -3. • Carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling: To BS EN 10209.

360 COATED STEEL FLAT PRODUCTS • Hot dip zinc coated carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10327 and BS EN

10143. • Hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip: To BS EN 10143 and BS EN 10326. • Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10326 and 10327. • Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10327. • Organic coated flat products: To BS EN 10169-1.

370 STEEL STRUCTURAL HOLLOW SECTIONS (SHS) • Non alloy and fine grain steels, hot finished: To BS EN 10210-1 and -2. • Non-alloy and fine grain steels, cold formed welded: To BS EN 10219-2. • Weather resistant steels, hot finished: To BS 7668.

Z12


Z12

Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

Z12


Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment


110 TREATMENT APPLICATION • Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling components. • Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution. • Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that treatment has been

carried out as specified.

120 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS • Standard: Current edition of the British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing Association (BWPDA) Manual.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT CYCLES • General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of specified wood species.

140 COPPER-ORGANIC PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT • Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractors choice Product reference: contractors choice • Application: High pressure impregnation. • Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After treatment, allow timber to dry before using.

150 COPPER CHROMIUM BASED PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT • Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractors choice Product reference: Contractors choice - Application: High pressure impregnation. • Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After treatment, allow timber to dry for at least 14 days before using.

160 ORGANIC SOLVENT PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT • Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractors choice Product reference: Contractors choice - Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation, or immersion. • Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before use.

165 WATER BASED MICROEMULSION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT • Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractors choice

Z12


Product reference Contractors choice : - Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation. • Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before use.

167 BORON COMPOUND PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT • Solution: - Manufacturer: Contractors choice Product manager: Contractors choice - Application: High pressure impregnation. • Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After treatment allow timber to dry before using.

Z20


Z20

Fixings and adhesives

Z20


Z20 Fixings and adhesives


PRODUCTS

310 FASTENERS GENERALLY • Materials: To have: - Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed. - Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location. • Appearance: Submit samples on request.

320 PACKINGS • Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof. • Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads.

330 NAILED TIMBER FASTENERS • Nails: - Steel: To BS 1202-1 or BS EN 10230-1. - Copper: To BS EN 1202-2. - Aluminium: To BS 1202-3.

340 MASONRY FIXINGS • Light duty: Plugs and screws. • Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

350 PLUGS • Type: Proprietary types to suit substrate, loads to be supported and conditions expected in use.

360 ANCHORS • Types: - Expansion: For use in substrate strong enough to resist forces generated by expansion of

anchor. - Adhesive or chemical: For use in substrate where expansion of anchor would fracture substrate. For use in irregular substrate where expansion anchors cannot transfer load on anchor. - Cavity: For use where the anchor is retained by toggles of the plug locking onto the inside face of the cavity.

370 WOOD SCREWS • Type: - Wood screws (traditional pattern). Standard: To BS 1210. - Wood screws. Pattern: Parallel, fully threaded shank or twin thread types. • Washers and screw cups: Where required are to be of same material as screw.

380 MISCELLANEOUS SCREWS • Type: To suit the fixing requirement of the components and substrate. - Pattern: Self-tapping, metallic drive screws, or power driven screws.

Z20


• Washers and screw cups: Where required to be of same material as screw.

390 ADHESIVES GENERALLY • Standards: - Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic: To BS 1203. - Thermosetting wood adhesives: To BS EN 12765. - Polyvinyl acetate thermoplastic adhesive: To BS 4071.

410 POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS • Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING GENERALLY • Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities and spacings of fixings,

fasteners and packings to retain supported components without distortion or loss of support. • Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals: Isolate with washers/ sleeves

to avoid bimetallic corrosion. • Appearance: Fixings to be in straight lines at regular centres.

620 FIXING THROUGH FINISHES • Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing.

630 FIXING PACKINGS • Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials and components. • Limits: Do not use packings beyond thicknesses recommended by fixings and fasteners

manufacturer. • Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.

640 FIXING CRAMPS • Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at 600 mm maximum centres. • Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material as cramps. • Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar.

650 NAILED TIMBER FIXING • Penetration: Drive fully in without splitting or crushing timber. • Surfaces visible in completed work: Punch nail heads below wrot surfaces. • Nailed timber joints: Two nails per joint (minimum), opposed skew driven.

660 SCREW FIXING • Finished level of countersunk screw heads: - Exposed: Flush with timber surface. - Concealed (holes filled or stopped): Sink minimum 2 mm below surface.

670 PELLETED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING • Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface. • Pellets: Cut from matching timber, match grain and glue in to full depth of hole. • Finished level of pellets: Flush with surface.

Z20


680 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING • Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface. • Plugs: Glue in to full depth of hole. • Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface.

690 USING POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS • Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified. • Operatives: Trained and certified as competent by tool manufacturer.

700 APPLYING ADHESIVES • Surfaces: Clean. Adjust regularity and texture to suit bonding and gap filling characteristics of

adhesive. • Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do not mark surfaces of or distort

components being fixed. • Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.

Z21


Z21 Mortars

Z21


Z21 Mortars


CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS

110 CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MIXES • Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are specified

elsewhere.

120 SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS • Standard: To BS EN 13139. • Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP). - Fines content where the proportion of sand in a mortar mix is specified as a range (e.g. 1:1: 5-

6): Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines. Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines. • Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture. Obtain from one source.

131 READY-MIXED LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS • Standard: To BS EN 998-2. • Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1. - Type: CL 90S. • Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.

135 SITE MADE LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS • Permitted use: Where a special colour is not required and in lieu of factory made ready- mixed

material. • Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1. - Type: CL 90S. • Mixing: Thoroughly mix lime with sand, in the dry state. Add water and mix again. Allow to stand,

without drying out, for at least 16 hours before using.

160 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS • Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Types: Portland cement, CEM I. Portland limestone cement, CEM ll/A-L or CEM ll/A-LL. Portland slag cement, CEM II/B-S. Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/B-V. - Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5. • White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked. - Type: Portland cement, CEM I. - Strength class: 52.5. • Sulfate resisting Portland cement: - Types: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked. To BS EN 197-1 fly ash cement, CEM ll/B-V and CE marked. - Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5. • Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1 and CE marked. Class: MC 12.5. 180 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS

Z21


• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with other mortar constituents.

• Other admixtures: Submit proposals. • Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any admixture containing calcium

chloride.

190 RETARDED READY TO USE CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR • Standard: To BS EN 998-2. • Lime for cement:lime:sand mortars: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1. - Type: CL 90S. • Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878. • Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer. Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

200 STORAGE OF CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MATERIALS • Sands and aggregates: Keep different types/ grades in separate stockpiles on hard, clean, free-

draining bases. • Factory made ready-mixed lime:sand/ ready to use retarded mortars: Keep in covered containers

to prevent drying out or wetting. • Bagged cement/ hydrated lime: Store off the ground in dry conditions.

210 MAKING CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS • Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets. - Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of damp sand. • Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps. - Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically. Do not overmix. • Working time (maximum): Two hours at normal temperatures. • Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

LIME:SAND MORTARS

310 LIME:SAND MORTAR MIXES • Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are specified

elsewhere.

320 SAND FOR LIME:SAND MASONRY MORTARS • Type: Sharp, well graded. - Quality, sampling and testing: To BS EN 13139. - Grading/ Source: As specified elsewhere in relevant mortar mix items.

330 READY PREPARED LIME PUTTY • Type: Slaked directly from CL 90 quicklime to BS 890, using an excess of water. - Maturation: In pits/ containers that allow excess water to drain away. - Density of matured lime putty: 1.3 - 1.4 kg/litre. • Maturation period before use (minimum): 30 days.

335 READY PREPARED LIME PUTTY • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Maturation period before use (minimum): 30 days.

340 POZZOLANIC ADDITIVES FOR NONHYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS • Manufacturer/ Supplier: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Mixing: Mix thoroughly into mortar during knocking up.

Z21


345 ADMIXTURES FOR HYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS

• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with other mortar constituents.

• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any admixture containing calcium chloride.

350 STORAGE OF LIME:SAND MORTAR MATERIALS • Sands and aggregates: Keep different types/ grades in separate stockpiles on hard, clean, free-draining bases. • Ready prepared nonhydraulic lime putty: Prevent drying out and protect from frost. • Nonhydraulic lime:sand mortar: Store on clean bases or in clean containers that allow free

drainage. Prevent drying out or wetting and protect from frost. • Bagged hydrated hydraulic lime: Store off the ground in dry conditions.

360 MAKING LIME:SAND MORTARS GENERALLY • Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets. • Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps. • Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials, including cement.

370 SITE PREPARED NONHYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS • Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly by compressing, beating and chopping. Do not add water. - Equipment: Roller pan mixer or submit proposals. • Maturation period before use (maximum): Seek instructions.

380 READY TO USE NONHYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS • Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. - Product reference: Contractor's choice. • Materials: Select from: - Lime putty slaked directly from quicklime to BS EN 459-1 and mixed thoroughly with sand. - Quicklime to BS EN 459-1 slaked directly with sand. • Maturation period before use (maximum): Seek instructions.

390 KNOCKING UP NONHYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS • Knocking up before and during use: Achieve and maintain a workable consistency by compressing, beating and chopping. Do not add water. - Equipment: Roller pan mixer or submit proposals.

400 MAKING HYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS • Mixing hydrated hydraulic lime:sand: Follow the lime manufacturer's recommendations for each

stage of the mix. - Water quantity: Only sufficient to produce a workable mix. • Working time: Within limits recommended by the hydraulic lime manufacturer.

Z22


Z22

Sealants

Z22


Z22 Sealants


PRODUCTS

310 JOINTSas specified in relevant section • Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS • Presealing checks: - Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant. - Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable. • Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification.

620 PREPARING JOINTS • Surfaces to which sealant must adhere: - Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease, surface water and contaminants that may affect bond. - Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. • Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with primer or sealant. • Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth, without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps. • Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.

630 APPLYING SEALANTS • Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected by frost, ice or snow. • Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints by heating. • Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firm adhesion to substrates. • Sealant profiles: - Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave. - Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex. • Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.

Z31


Z31

Powder coatings

Z31


Z31 Powder coatings


120 POWDER COATING MATERIALS � Manufacturer: Obtain from one only of the following: Contractor's choice . � Selected manufacturer: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES � Requirement: Comply with: - BS 6496 for aluminium alloy backgrounds. - BS EN 13438 for galvanized steel and sheradized backgrounds. - British Coatings Federation: Code of safe practice - Application of thermosetting powder coatings

by electrostatic spraying. � Powder coating manufacturer's guarantee.

220 POWDER COATING APPLICATORS

− Applicator requirements: − Approved by powder coating manufacturer.

− Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.

− Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests required by powder coating manufacturer.

− Each applicator to use only one plant. � Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.

225 GUARANTEES � Powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees:

− Submit sample copies before commencement of powder coating.

− Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES � Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of appearance for:

− Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to be used, showing any colour, texture and gloss variation.

− Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected and how any cut metal edges are protected.

� Samples to include the following information:

− Product reference.

− Colour: tbc

− Reference number. tbc − Name. tbc

− Gloss level. tbc 235 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AT PLANT

� Requirement: Contractors/ suppliers of the following designated components must commission an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out acceptance inspections to confirm that powder coating application complies with this specification.

− Designated components: All . � Acceptance inspections: Carry out for each variation of colour and finish of each

Z31


component work package at applicator's plant prior to any fabrication of units, in accordance with the following:

− Where three of more production runs are required for application of coatings, not less than three acceptance inspections must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-1, general inspection level 2, with an acceptance quality limit of 1%.

− Where less than three production runs are required for application of coatings, one acceptance inspection must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-2, with a limiting quality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%.

� Components failing inspection: Reprocess or replace and reinspect. � Inspection reports: Independent Inspection Authority must submit copies.

240 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM � Requirement: Powder and coating application to the following designated components is to be

tested and approved in accordance with the Qualy coat system. � Designated components: All

250 COMPONENT DESIGN � Condition of components to be powder coated:

− To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4. − Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.

− Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.

310 PRETREATMENT � Condition of components to be powder coated:

− Free from corrosion and damage. − Free from inpurities including soil, grease, oil.

− Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment and powder coating process. � Process: Clean, conversion coat, condition, rinse in demineralised water, drain and dry

components in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer's requirements and the pretreatment supplier's recommendations.

320 PRETREATMENT OF STEEL COMPONENTS � Condition of components to be pretreated: � Free from corrosion and damage. � All welding and jointing completed and finish off as specified. � Free from impurities including soil, grease, oil. � Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment process. � Conversion coating requirements: To BS EN 13438. � Rinsing requirements: Use demineralized water. Drain and dry.

430 EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS � Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring protection. Coated

surfaces will be deemed 'significant surfaces' for relevant BS 6496/ BS EN 13438 performance requirements.

435 APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS � Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits. � Completion of powder coatings: Within 48 hours of pre-treatment of components. � Jig points: Not visible on coated components. � Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended by powder

coating manufacturer. � Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of powder coating

manufacturer. Stripping, pretreatment and powder coating are to be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

� Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.

Z31


440 PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS � Standard: To BS 6496/ BS EN 13438.

450 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FABRICATIONS • Units may be assembled: - Before powder coating. - From components powder coated after cutting to size. - Where approved, from components powder coated before cutting to size. • Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable. • Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if

sealants are visible after fabrication.

460 STEEL FABRICATIONS • Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating. • Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable. • Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if sealants are visible after fabrication.

470 FIXINGS • Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with matching repair paint system applied in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer's recommendations.

480 FABRICATION DAMAGE REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT • Inspection: Check all components before delivery to site for damage to powder coatings. Submit proposals for repair or replacement.

510 PROTECTION • Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling and installation, or by subsequent site operations. • Protective coverings: Must be: - Resistant to weather conditions. - Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points. • Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be: - Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour. - Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating manufacturers' recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues as these are detrimental to the coating. • Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or deficiency. 535 DOCUMENTATION • Submit the following information for each batch of powder coated components: - Supplier. - Trade name. - Colour. - Type of powder. - Method of application. - Batch and reference number. Statutory requirements. 540 COMPLETION • Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with procedures detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.

1078782 westwood architectural specification-7500 - rev … · 2017-08-21 · project specification...

Documents